331
All rights reserved © 2012 ElectroMagneticWorks Inc. 8300 St-Patrick, Suite 300, Montreal, H8N 2H1, Qc, CANADA - www.emworks.com - [email protected] - Phone: (514) 634 9797 Printed Documentation User Guide 2012

EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

All rights reserved © 2012 ElectroMagneticWorks Inc. 8300 St-Patrick, Suite 300, Montreal, H8N 2H1, Qc, CANADA - www.emworks.com - [email protected] - Phone: (514) 634 9797

Printed Documentation

User Guide 2012

Page 2: EMS_UserGuide.pdf
Page 3: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

iii

Table of Contents

EMS Online User's Guide .............................................................................................................................................. 1

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................... 2

Conventions................................................................................................................................................................ 3

Access to Help ............................................................................................................................................................ 4

What's New in EMS 2012 ............................................................................................................................................... 5

What's New in EMS 2012 - Overview ......................................................................................................................... 5

New in User Interface ................................................................................................................................................. 6

New in Analysis .......................................................................................................................................................... 7

New in Meshing & Pre-Processing ........................................................................................................................... 10

New in Result Viewing .............................................................................................................................................. 11

Analysis Background .................................................................................................................................................... 13

Analysis Background ................................................................................................................................................ 13

About Maxwell's Equations ....................................................................................................................................... 14

What is Low Frequency Electromagnetics? .............................................................................................................. 15

Electrostatic Analysis ................................................................................................................................................ 16

What is Electrostatic Analysis? ............................................................................................................................. 16

Material Properties ................................................................................................................................................ 18

Assigning a Voltage to a Conductor ...................................................................................................................... 19

Forces and Torques .............................................................................................................................................. 20

Required Input for Electrostatic Analysis .............................................................................................................. 21

Performing Electrostatic Analysis .......................................................................................................................... 22

Output of Electrostatic Analysis ............................................................................................................................ 23

Electric Conduction Analysis .................................................................................................................................... 24

What is Electric Conduction Analysis? .................................................................................................................. 24

Material Properties ................................................................................................................................................ 26

Page 4: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

iv

Applicable Restraints ............................................................................................................................................ 27

Resistance Calculation ......................................................................................................................................... 28

Required Input for Electric Conduction Analysis ................................................................................................... 29

Performing Electric Conduction Analysis .............................................................................................................. 30

Output of Electric Conduction Analysis ................................................................................................................. 31

Magnetostatic Analysis ............................................................................................................................................. 32

What is Magnetostatic Analysis? .......................................................................................................................... 32

Material Properties ................................................................................................................................................ 34

Applicable Boundary Conditions ........................................................................................................................... 35

Forces and Torques .............................................................................................................................................. 36

Required Input for Magnetostatic Analysis ............................................................................................................ 37

Performing Magnetostatic Analysis ....................................................................................................................... 38

Output of Magnetostatic Analysis .......................................................................................................................... 39

AC Magnetic Analysis ............................................................................................................................................... 40

What is AC Magnetic Analysis? ............................................................................................................................ 40

Skin Depth Calculation .......................................................................................................................................... 42

Material Properties ................................................................................................................................................ 43

Applicable Boundary Conditions ........................................................................................................................... 44

Forces and Torques .............................................................................................................................................. 45

Required Input for AC Magnetic Analysis ............................................................................................................. 46

Performing AC Magnetic Analysis ......................................................................................................................... 47

Output of AC Magnetic Analysis ........................................................................................................................... 48

Transient Magnetic Analysis ..................................................................................................................................... 50

What is Transient Magnetic Analysis? .................................................................................................................. 50

Material Properties ................................................................................................................................................ 52

Applicable Boundary Conditions ........................................................................................................................... 54

Forces and Torques .............................................................................................................................................. 55

Page 5: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Table of Contents

v

Required Input for Transient Magnetic Analysis .................................................................................................... 56

Performing Transient Magnetic Analysis ............................................................................................................... 57

Output of Transient Magnetic Analysis ................................................................................................................. 58

Thermal Analysis ...................................................................................................................................................... 60

What is Thermal Analysis?.................................................................................................................................... 60

Performing Thermal Analysis ................................................................................................................................ 61

Output of Thermal Analysis ................................................................................................................................... 62

Mechanisms of Heat Transfer ............................................................................................................................... 63

Motion Analysis ........................................................................................................................................................ 74

What Is Motion Analysis? ...................................................................................................................................... 74

Performing Motion Analysis .................................................................................................................................. 75

Output of Motion Analysis ..................................................................................................................................... 80

EMS Fundamentals ...................................................................................................................................................... 81

EMS Fundamentals .................................................................................................................................................. 81

Benefits of Analysis .................................................................................................................................................. 82

Basic Concepts of Analysis ...................................................................................................................................... 83

EMS Manager Tree .................................................................................................................................................. 85

Design Studies ......................................................................................................................................................... 86

Using Design Studies ............................................................................................................................................ 86

Analysis Steps .......................................................................................................................................................... 87

Material Properties ................................................................................................................................................... 88

Restraints and Loads ................................................................................................................................................ 89

Specifying Directions ................................................................................................................................................ 90

Coordinate Systems .............................................................................................................................................. 90

Coils or Electromagnets ........................................................................................................................................... 91

Air Modeling.............................................................................................................................................................. 92

Air truncation ......................................................................................................................................................... 92

Page 6: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

vi

How far is the air region? ...................................................................................................................................... 92

Air meshing ........................................................................................................................................................... 92

An exception ......................................................................................................................................................... 92

Meshing .................................................................................................................................................................... 93

Running Studies ....................................................................................................................................................... 94

Viewing Results ........................................................................................................................................................ 95

Coordinate Systems ................................................................................................................................................. 96

The Global Coordinate System ............................................................................................................................. 96

Local Coordinate Systems .................................................................................................................................... 96

Result Databases ..................................................................................................................................................... 97

Working with Assemblies .......................................................................................................................................... 98

About Units ............................................................................................................................................................... 99

Languages .............................................................................................................................................................. 100

EMS Interface ............................................................................................................................................................ 101

EMS Interface Components.................................................................................................................................... 101

EMS Manager Tree ................................................................................................................................................ 102

EMS Manager Tree ............................................................................................................................................. 102

EMS Manager Tree Conventions ........................................................................................................................ 103

Define Study Name ............................................................................................................................................. 104

Drag and Drop Functionality ............................................................................................................................... 105

Toolbars ................................................................................................................................................................. 106

EMS Toolbars ..................................................................................................................................................... 106

Design Studies ........................................................................................................................................................... 109

Design Studies ....................................................................................................................................................... 109

Concept of Design Studies ..................................................................................................................................... 110

Study Types............................................................................................................................................................ 111

Element Types ........................................................................................................................................................ 112

Page 7: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Table of Contents

vii

Study ...................................................................................................................................................................... 113

EMS Analysis Options ............................................................................................................................................ 114

Electrostatic Analysis Options ............................................................................................................................. 115

Electric Conduction Analysis Options ................................................................................................................. 116

Magnetostatic Analysis Options .......................................................................................................................... 117

AC Magnetic Analysis Options ............................................................................................................................ 118

Transient Magnetic Analysis Options .................................................................................................................. 119

EMS Matrix Solvers ................................................................................................................................................ 120

Multiple Studies ...................................................................................................................................................... 121

Activating a SolidWorks Configuration .................................................................................................................... 122

Modifying the Properties of a Study ........................................................................................................................ 123

Deleting a Study ..................................................................................................................................................... 124

Running a Study ..................................................................................................................................................... 125

Material Information ................................................................................................................................................... 127

Material Properties ................................................................................................................................................. 127

Material Properties Used in EMS ............................................................................................................................ 128

Material Models ...................................................................................................................................................... 130

Linear Materials .................................................................................................................................................. 130

Nonlinear Materials ............................................................................................................................................. 130

Isotropic Materials ............................................................................................................................................... 130

Orthotropic Materials ........................................................................................................................................... 130

Defining Orthotropic Properties For Solids .......................................................................................................... 130

About Permanent Magnets ..................................................................................................................................... 132

The B-H Curve of a Material ................................................................................................................................... 135

Assigning Materials to your Model .......................................................................................................................... 136

Creating or Inserting a Materials Library ................................................................................................................. 137

Adding a Material to an Existing Library ................................................................................................................. 138

Page 8: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

viii

Assigning a B-H Curve to a Material ....................................................................................................................... 139

Assigning a Permanent Magnet.............................................................................................................................. 140

Assigning an Orthotropic Material ........................................................................................................................... 141

Using Drag and Drop to Define Materials ............................................................................................................... 142

Function Curves ......................................................................................................................................................... 143

About Function Curves ........................................................................................................................................... 143

Creating or Editing a Curve Library ........................................................................................................................ 144

Viewing a Curve Library ......................................................................................................................................... 145

Loads and Restraints ................................................................................................................................................. 147

Loads and Restraints .............................................................................................................................................. 147

Fixed Voltage.......................................................................................................................................................... 148

Floating Conductor ................................................................................................................................................. 149

Contact Resistance ................................................................................................................................................ 150

Charge Density ....................................................................................................................................................... 151

Total Charge ........................................................................................................................................................... 152

Normal Flux ............................................................................................................................................................ 153

Modifying Loads and Restraints ............................................................................................................................ 154

Thermal Loads & Restraints ................................................................................................................................... 155

Temperature ....................................................................................................................................................... 155

Convection .......................................................................................................................................................... 156

Heat Flux............................................................................................................................................................. 157

Volume Heat ....................................................................................................................................................... 158

Summary of Loads and Restraints ......................................................................................................................... 159

Coils ........................................................................................................................................................................... 161

About Coils ............................................................................................................................................................. 161

Wound and Solid Coils ........................................................................................................................................... 162

Magnetostatic Study ........................................................................................................................................... 162

Page 9: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Table of Contents

ix

AC and Transient Magnetic Studies .................................................................................................................... 162

Coil Properties ........................................................................................................................................................ 163

Net Current ......................................................................................................................................................... 163

Entry and Exit Ports ............................................................................................................................................ 163

Loops or closed Coils .......................................................................................................................................... 163

Current-Time Curve ................................................................................................................................................ 165

Adding a Coil .......................................................................................................................................................... 166

Adding a Coil to Magnetostatic study ..................................................................................................................... 167

Adding a Coil to an AC Magnetic Study .................................................................................................................. 168

Adding a Coil to a Transient Magnetic Study .......................................................................................................... 170

Modifying a Coil ...................................................................................................................................................... 172

Summary of Coils ................................................................................................................................................... 173

Forces and Torques ................................................................................................................................................... 177

About Forces and Torques ..................................................................................................................................... 177

The Lorentz Force Method .................................................................................................................................. 178

The Virtual Work Method .................................................................................................................................... 178

The Maxwell Stress Method ................................................................................................................................ 179

Force Computation Methods .................................................................................................................................. 180

The Lorentz Force Method .................................................................................................................................. 180

The Virtual Work Method .................................................................................................................................... 180

The Maxwell Stress Method ................................................................................................................................ 181

Computing a Force/Torque ..................................................................................................................................... 182

Modifying a Force/Torque ....................................................................................................................................... 183

Summary of Forces/Torques .................................................................................................................................. 184

Resistance ................................................................................................................................................................. 185

About Resistance ................................................................................................................................................... 185

Computing a Resistance ........................................................................................................................................ 186

Page 10: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

x

Modifying a Resistance Set .................................................................................................................................... 187

Capacitance ............................................................................................................................................................... 189

Computing Capacitance Matrix............................................................................................................................... 189

Circuit Parameters ..................................................................................................................................................... 191

Computing Circuit Parameters................................................................................................................................ 191

Meshing ..................................................................................................................................................................... 193

Background on Meshing ......................................................................................................................................... 193

Meshing Parameters .............................................................................................................................................. 194

Rebuilding the Mesh ............................................................................................................................................... 195

Automatic Looping .................................................................................................................................................. 196

Meshing Options ..................................................................................................................................................... 197

Mesh ....................................................................................................................................................................... 198

Controlling the Mesh ............................................................................................................................................... 199

Mesh Control Parameters ................................................................................................................................... 199

Mesh Control Parameters ................................................................................................................................... 200

Mesh Control Examples ...................................................................................................................................... 201

Failure Diagnostics ................................................................................................................................................. 202

Meshing Tips .......................................................................................................................................................... 203

Viewing Results.......................................................................................................................................................... 205

Viewing Analysis Results ........................................................................................................................................ 205

Compare Studies Results ....................................................................................................................................... 206

Plotting Results ....................................................................................................................................................... 208

Plotting Results ................................................................................................................................................... 208

Electric Potential Plot .......................................................................................................................................... 210

Electric Field Plot ................................................................................................................................................ 211

Electric Displacement Plot .................................................................................................................................. 212

Current Density Plot ............................................................................................................................................ 213

Page 11: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Table of Contents

xi

Magnetic Flux Density Plot.................................................................................................................................. 214

Magnetic Field Plot ............................................................................................................................................. 215

Applied Current Density Plot ............................................................................................................................... 216

Current Density Plot ............................................................................................................................................ 217

Force Density Plot ............................................................................................................................................... 218

Losses Density Plot ............................................................................................................................................ 219

Compute Flux ...................................................................................................................................................... 220

Compute Voltage ................................................................................................................................................ 221

Thermal Plotting Results ..................................................................................................................................... 222

Summary of Plots ................................................................................................................................................ 225

Graphing Results .................................................................................................................................................... 226

Graphing Results ................................................................................................................................................ 226

Graphing of Probed Result Plots ......................................................................................................................... 227

Graphing Results on a Line Segment ................................................................................................................. 228

Manipulating Result Plots ....................................................................................................................................... 229

Processing Result Plots ...................................................................................................................................... 229

Editing a Result Plot ............................................................................................................................................ 230

Section ................................................................................................................................................................ 231

Iso Clipping ......................................................................................................................................................... 233

Animate 3D Plots ................................................................................................................................................ 234

3D Plot Listing ..................................................................................................................................................... 235

Chart Options ...................................................................................................................................................... 236

Printing Result Plots ............................................................................................................................................ 238

Saving Result Plots ............................................................................................................................................. 239

Renaming Plot .................................................................................................................................................... 240

Deleting a Result Plot ......................................................................................................................................... 241

Copying a Result Plot Between Studies .............................................................................................................. 242

Page 12: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

xii

Adding a Plot Title ............................................................................................................................................... 243

Annotating Extreme Values on a Plot ................................................................................................................. 244

Customizing Plot Legend .................................................................................................................................... 245

Including User Information in a Plot .................................................................................................................... 246

Probing Results ...................................................................................................................................................... 247

Probing Results ................................................................................................................................................... 247

Point Probing ...................................................................................................................................................... 248

Spline Probing ..................................................................................................................................................... 249

Probe .................................................................................................................................................................. 250

Study Reports ............................................................................................................................................................ 251

Study Reports ......................................................................................................................................................... 251

Report ..................................................................................................................................................................... 252

Generating a Report ............................................................................................................................................... 253

Setting the Cover Page .......................................................................................................................................... 254

Setting Introduction ................................................................................................................................................. 255

Setting Description ................................................................................................................................................. 256

Setting Model View ................................................................................................................................................. 257

Setting Conclusion .................................................................................................................................................. 258

EMS Options .............................................................................................................................................................. 259

System Options - General ...................................................................................................................................... 259

What's Wrong Messages .................................................................................................................................... 259

Mesh colors ......................................................................................................................................................... 259

Result plots ......................................................................................................................................................... 259

System Options - Default Library ............................................................................................................................ 260

Default Options (New Study) - Units ....................................................................................................................... 261

Symbol Settings-Default Options ............................................................................................................................ 262

Symbol quality ..................................................................................................................................................... 262

Page 13: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Table of Contents

xiii

Default Options (New Study) - Load/Restraint ........................................................................................................ 263

Symbol size ......................................................................................................................................................... 263

Symbol colors ..................................................................................................................................................... 263

Resistance Set - Default Options (New Study) ....................................................................................................... 264

Symbol size ......................................................................................................................................................... 264

Symbol colors ..................................................................................................................................................... 264

Coils - Default Options (New Study) ....................................................................................................................... 265

Symbol size ......................................................................................................................................................... 265

Symbol colors ..................................................................................................................................................... 265

Force/Torque - Default Options (New Study).......................................................................................................... 266

Symbol size ......................................................................................................................................................... 266

Symbol colors ..................................................................................................................................................... 266

Mesh Control - Default Options (New Study) .......................................................................................................... 267

Symbol size ......................................................................................................................................................... 267

Symbol colors ..................................................................................................................................................... 267

Mesh - Default Options (New Study) ...................................................................................................................... 268

Element Growth Rate .......................................................................................................................................... 268

Accurate Curvature Representation .................................................................................................................... 268

Automatic Looping for solids ............................................................................................................................... 268

Default Options (New Study) - Results ................................................................................................................... 269

Results folder ...................................................................................................................................................... 269

Report folder ....................................................................................................................................................... 269

Default Options (New Study) - Plot ......................................................................................................................... 270

Annotation and range .......................................................................................................................................... 270

Settings options .................................................................................................................................................. 270

Font ..................................................................................................................................................................... 270

Default Options (New Study) - Color Chart ............................................................................................................. 271

Page 14: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

xiv

Position ............................................................................................................................................................... 271

Width ................................................................................................................................................................... 271

Number format .................................................................................................................................................... 271

Color options ....................................................................................................................................................... 271

Default Options (New Study) - User information ..................................................................................................... 272

Support and Service ................................................................................................................................................... 273

How to Contact Us? ................................................................................................................................................ 273

Mailing Address ...................................................................................................................................................... 274

World Wide Web ..................................................................................................................................................... 275

Index .......................................................................................................................................................................... 277

Page 15: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

1

EMS Online User's Guide

EMS Online User's Guide

EMS2012 online help includes descriptions and instructions for all the analysis features and capabilities of the EMS software.

What's New in EMS 2012

Read an overview of the new functionality in this software release and learn how to access topics with more information.

EMS Fundamentals

Learn basic concepts and terminology used throughout the EMS software.

EMS Reference

Electrostatic

Electric Conduction

Magnetostatic

AC Magnetic

Transient Magnetic

Design Studies

Material Properties

Function Curves

Loads and

Restraints

Coils

Forces and Torques

Resistance

Capacitance

Inductance

Meshing

Viewing Results

Study Reports

EMS Options

Page 16: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

2

Overview

Welcome to the EMS Online User's Guide. This help includes

descriptions and instructions for all of the analysis features and

capabilities of the EMS software. Conventions. Describes the font conventions and buttons used in help

Access to Help. Lists the ways to access the help, as well as helpful hints for

searching

Resources. Lists other EMS documents

What's New. Lists the new functionality in this software release as well as

links to other topics with more information

EMS 2012 requires SolidWorks 2012 version.

Page 17: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS Online User's Guide

3

Conventions

The help uses the following font and icon conventions:

bold - Indicates a user interface element such as a menu item, tool tip, title of a dialog box, and so on.

italic green - Click to display more information. This shortens long topics so you can quickly scan the information.

- Represents a note or a tip. It is not a link; the information

follows the icon. Notes and tips provide time-saving steps and helpful hints.

Page 18: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

4

Access to Help

You can access the EMS Online User's Guide in many ways,

including:

click Help, EMS Help Topics to open the default page.

Click Help, or click in a dialog box or PropertyManager to access

context-sensitive help.

Once in the help, you can use the TOC, Index, or Search tab to

locate a topic. Here are some hints for using the Search tab:

Use wildcard characters to broaden your search.

Try to create Boolean searches by adding terms such as "AND", "OR", "NOT", and "NEAR".

Select the Search previous results check box to use only the previously

found topics for the next search. This allows you to narrow down your search by adding keywords.

Select the Match similar words check box to highlight similar words in the

found topics. For example, if you search for "open", topics with both "open" and "opening" are found.

Select the Search titles only check box to find only topics where the

keyword is in the title.

Page 19: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

5

What's New in EMS 2012

What's New in EMS 2012 - Overview

EMS 2012 is the sixth release of EMS as a Gold Certified add-in to SolidWorks.

This is a major new release of the software and incorporates several new features at the meshing/preprocessing, solving and post-processing levels. New capabilities have been added in this release to EMS's 5 solvers to provide users with more comprehensive simulation options and a more complete set of results. Materials and meshing have also been improved in this release while post-processing now incorporates new functionality.

To access What's New topics, select a subject area from the Table of Contents or follow the links:

What's New - User Interface What's New - Meshing & Pre-Processing What's New - Analysis What's New - Result Viewing

Page 20: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

6

New in User Interface

Tool tip added to EMS Feature manager tree

EMViewer License: Read-only license of EMS that enable user to view EMS results

without requiring a full license.

Results tables: results tables are now accessible directly through a single mouse click.

EMViewer License: This is a special license that allows users to open EMS studies, browse all settings, view

results and have full access to all post-processing operations without requiring a full EMS license. By default, studies are opened in view-only mode, which allows users to modify existing plots,create new ones and generate new reports. A read-only option, which does not allow any modifications is also available to users and can be selected at the time of opening the study. The EMViewer does not allow users to create studies or run an analysis.

Page 21: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

What's New in EMS 2012

7

New in Analysis

Electric Conduction Analyses

Motion Analysis : Motion with six degrees of freedom using

SolidWorks motion 2012.

user can run motion analysis and access motion results after a good run.

Exclude From Analysis: this feature enable the user to exclude an existant

component from the analysis solution without having to suppress the excluded component.

Compute Capacitance: users will access computed capacitance results after a good run.

Precision control: Users can now choose from three levels of precision, Normal, High and Very High, when performing Electrostatic or Conduction analyses. This feature helps users capture highly varying electric fields and currents with increased precision.

True floating conductors: the floating conductor boundary condition is now treated differently in EMS. Whereas the solver internally assigned a different voltage (1 or 0) to each floating conductor in previous release, now it treats floating conductors are equipotential bodies/surfaces with unknown potential values to be computed. This approach is more realistic and accurate than alternative options such as specifying a large permittivity to a conductor in order to consider it truly floating.

Magnetostatic Analysis

Motion Analysis :Motion with six degrees of freedom using

SolidWorks motion 2012.

More accurate Transient-motion coupled solver.

Faster nonlinear Newton-Raphson solver.

Exclude From Analysis: this new feature enable the user to exclude an

existant component from the analysis solution without having to suppress the excluded component.

Compute Circuit Parameters: users will access computed circuit parameters results after a good run.

Coil Modeling: coil modeling in EMS is now substantially improved. Wound coils can now be defined using the wire gage (using AWG standard sizes) or the wire diameter.

Coil Excitation: in addition to the existing current driven coil excitation, a voltage driven coil can now be defined. The external voltage source’s resistance can be specified.

Coil DC Resistance: the coil’s DC resistance is now accurately and automatically computed based on the AWG/diameter specification.

Applied Current Density: the computation of the applied current density distribution has been improved for wound coils to reflect its uniform nature due to insulation between wires.

Page 22: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

8

Normal Flux Boundary Condition: the use of the normal flux boundary condition on an outer face, which was required for uniqueness of the solution, in no longer necessary. EMS now uses a new technique based on the tree-cotree branch cuts to ensure solution uniqueness. The normal flux boundary condition can still be used to applicable symmetry situations.

AC-Magnetic Analysis

Motion Analysis : Motion with six degrees of freedom using

SolidWorks motion 2012.

Faster nonlinear Newton-Raphson solver.

user can run motion analysis and access motion results after a good run.

Exclude From Analysis: this new feature enable the user to exclude an

existant component from the analysis solution without having to suppress the excluded component.

Compute Circuit Parameters: users will access computed circuit parameters results after a good run.

Split Core Loss: users will access computed losses results after a good run.

Coil Modeling: coil modeling in AC-Magnetic analysis has also been enhanced to include AWG standard specs for wound coils.

Coil Excitation and Coupling to External Circuits: voltage driven coil can now be defined along with an RLC external circuit.

Normal Flux Boundary Condition: the use of the normal flux boundary in AC-Magnetic analysis has been modified as in the case of Magnetostatic analysis.

Core Loss: all three components of core loss, i.e., Eddy, Hysteresis and Excess losses, are now computed. Ohmic, Eddy, Hysteresis, Excess, and Core losses are output to the results table for each component. Loss density distributions can be viewed with EMS’s standard visualization tools.

Loss Input: users have the option of importing manufacturer’s loss data through a file or entering it manually using EMS’s standard curve definition interface. Alternatively, users can use Steinmetz loss model and specify the proper coefficients for their material.

Lamination: users can now define laminated materials through EMS’s standard material editor. As with other EMS materials users can create, edit and save their own laminated materials libraries.

New Computed Parameters: voltages, currents, impedance matrices, coupling coefficients between coils and various loss terms. Leakage inductance is also computed for two conductor systems.

Multiply Connected Conductor Regions: conductors with one or more holes inside, i.e., multiply connected, require careful attention to obtain a unique solution. EMS now uses an automatic and more efficient approach to solving multiply connected regions that ensures solution uniqueness with speed and accuracy.

Transient Analysis

Motion Analysis : Motion with six degrees of freedom using

SolidWorks motion 2012.

Faster nonlinear Newton-Raphson solver.

user can run motion analysis and access motion results after a good run.

Exclude From Analysis: this new feature enable the user to exclude an

existant component from the analysis solution without having to suppress the excluded component.

Compute Circuit Parameters: users will access computed circuit parameters results after a good run.

Page 23: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

What's New in EMS 2012

9

Thermal Analysis : Fully embedded thermal simulation inside transient magnetic model.

Coil Modeling, Coil Excitation and Normal Flux Boundary Condition: these features are implemented in the Transient Analysis in similar manner to the AC-Magnetic analysis.

Coil Excitation Functions: in addition to the existing curve-based excitation definitions, users can now define excitation by functions. Implemented functions include: sinusoidal, exponential, pulse and single frequency FM (SFFM) current and voltage sources.

Non-linear Transient Solver: improved stability and convergence.

Page 24: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

10

New in Meshing & Pre-Processing

Auto-insert Air part is not possible allowing to insert a box, sphere or cylinder in the model : the inserted part will automatically include the required cavities to avoid interference.

Automatic insertion of the required cavities to avoid interference.

Auto-apply Air to apply air to all solid bodies in the study where no material

has been applied.

3D Mesh Pre-processing: Visualize and analyze the 3D mesh before

launching the solver. Because meshing is critical to solution accuracy and speed, EMS now provides users unparalleled mesh viewing capabilities. This powerful feature allows users to visually inspect the mesh in a clear and uncluttered manner before launching the solver. It includes probing, section viewing and iso-clipping of the 3D mesh.

Improved Meshing: In addition to existing mesh controls on faces and

components, which already give users complete control over the meshing process, new meshing features in EMS 2012 make meshing even faster and more robust. A new way of computing global element size has been added and mesh controls can now be applied to make the mesh coarser of finer. These features increase the mesher’s robustness considerably so that users will have more first time success in creating meshes.

Material Library: enhanced EMS built-in material library including many new

non-linear materials and material loss parameters.

Page 25: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

What's New in EMS 2012

11

New in Result Viewing

Auto generation of 2D drawing of the model under study and including it in

the study report.

More control on motion results exporting allowing to select all time steps for selected result or all results for selected time step.

New 2D plot of a selected 3D point over motion time steps.

2D plot of a selected parameters over transient time steps.

3D plot saving the plot view camera settings.

More control on transient results exporting allowing to select all time steps for selected result or all results for selected time step.

Comparison of Study Results: Enhanced tabular results from different

studies and different configurations can now be compared through 2D plots.

Advanced 3D Spline Probing: generates a 2-plot along spline curve cuts

through the model for any computed quantity (fluxes, fields, currents, temperature, etc). This feature allows users to probe results along arbitrarily curved lines in their model gaining access to otherwise hard to view data.

New Results: more 3D plots type are computed, like Voltage and Flux.

New Results: more 3D and tabular results are computed for Core Loss,

Ohmic Loss, Hysteresis Loss, Excess Loss, etc.

3D Plots Animation: plots from different studies can be animated in the

same plot window or saved to video file. This animation feature is available in the following cases:

o Any study type with motion results o Transient Magnetic study type with results o AC magnetic Study type with results

3D Plots Export: plots from different studies can be exported to a

Paraview( aopen source standalone 3D viewer for Windows/Unix/etc.)

2D Plots: Added text annotation to all reference point associated with a 2D

plot.

2D Plots: plots from different studies and different configuration can now be

superimposed in one window.

Report: Embedded HTML and Word Doc Viewer.

Page 26: EMS_UserGuide.pdf
Page 27: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

13

Analysis Background

Analysis Background

In EMS you can perform five types of analysis relevant to the electromagnetic and electromechanical engineering design process. This chapter provides the basic theoretical information you should have before running any type of analysis in EMS. It explains what each analysis does, the underlying assumptions, the required input, and the expected output. It also gives a brief description of how to perform each type of analysis.

The following is a list of the analysis types you can perform in EMS:

Electrostatic

Electric Conduction

Magnetostatic

AC Magnetic

Transient Magnetic

Page 28: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

14

About Maxwell's Equations

Maxwell’s equations are a set of partial differential equations that govern the behavior of electromagnetic devices. They are linear in space and time. When electromagnetic fields interact with materials, the equations can become nonlinear. The main quantities involved in Maxwell’s equations are:

The electric field intensity E

The electric flux density or electric displacement D

The magnetic field intensity H

The magnetic flux density or magnetic induction B

The surface current density J

The volume charge density .

In addition, we define:

The magnetic permeability

The electric permittivity

The electric conductivity

The four Maxwell’s equations are:

The above field equations are supplemented with the constitutive relations that describe the behavior of general electromagnetic material or media:

Page 29: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Analysis Background

15

What is Low Frequency Electromagnetics?

There are two major sub-domains in electromagnetics: low-frequency and high-frequency domains. Both domains are governed by Maxwell's equations.

The low-frequency domain includes the major part of the electromagnetic devices such as bushing, insulators, circuit breakers, power generators, transformers, electric motors, capacitors, magnetic levitation devices, synchronous machines, DC machines, permanent magnet motors, actuators, solenoids, etc.

Strictly speaking, any application in which displacement currents are negligible can be classified as low-frequency. The absence of the displacement currents de-couples the electric and magnetic fields and the situation becomes static.

The high-frequency domain includes the study of electromagnetic waves and propagation of energy through matter. It may be some times difficult to distinguish between high-frequency and low frequency. Nevertheless, we can generally say that electromagnetic fields in which the displacement currents cannot be neglected belong to the high-frequency domain. The displacement currents couple the electric and magnetic fields to each other and the situation becomes fully dynamic. Examples of devices that use high-frequency include antennas, waveguides, transmission lines, filters, couplers, dielectric resonators, etc.

Page 30: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

16

Electrostatic Analysis

What is Electrostatic Analysis?

Electrostatic analysis belongs to the low-frequency electromagnetic domain or regime. In this domain,

displacement currents are neglected. In addition, the fields depend on position only. They do not depend on time. The size of the object is much smaller than the wavelength.

With these conditions, the first two of Maxwell’s equations become:

Along with the constitutive relation:

By introducing an electric scalar potential, , and expressing the electric field as:

the famous Poisson’s equation:

is obtained. The electrostatic analysis solves the Poisson equation.

Applications

Most applications require the computations of electric field and related quantities such as capacitance. Applications include:

Bushing

Insulators

Capacitors

Strip-lines

Circuit breakers.

Electrostatic Assumption

Page 31: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Analysis Background

17

Electrostatic analysis assumes that no current flows in any material. Objects are either perfect conductors or perfect insulators. For conducting objects, the electric charges are condensed on their surfaces, which forces the field inside the conductors to be zero. Insulators are considered as perfect insulators with no current flowing inside them.

It is important to bear in mind the above electrostatic assumptions. Therefore, thick conductors can either be left as mesh voids or fully meshed. In the case where a thick conductor is kept as a mesh void, the boundary conditions are applied on the surface of the conductor to simulate their presence. However, if the thick conductors are actually meshed, the boundary conditions are applied on the component itself.

Conductors can have a zero thickness. In such cases, conductors are specified by a perfect conducting surface.

The only material property required is the relative permittivity. The electric conductivity is not required because it is considered either infinite in conducting objects or zero in insulators.

Linearity Assumption

The relationship between electric and displacement fields is linear requiring all materials in the model to have a linear relative permittivity.

Lossless Assumption

All materials are lossless which implies real permittivity in all material regions. As a result, all potential, electric, and displacement fields are real.

Page 32: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

18

Material Properties

For Electrostatic analysis, each component or body must be assigned a relative permittivity. This quantity is just a real number larger than or equal to 1.0 for isotropic materials. It can also be a tensor that varies with direction for orthotropic materials.

How about electric conductivity? You do not need to specify the electric conductivity of any part for this module. Electrostatic analysis assumes zero electric field inside conductors and zero current flow in non-conductors, i.e. insulators.

Certain materials maintain electric flux due to its microscopic dipoles permanent orientation. Such materials are to be permanently polarized or have a Permanent polarization. For such class of materials the constitutive relation between E and D are slightly different:

: where P is the permanent dipole moment. It is a vector quantity.

Since a permanently polarized material maintains an electric flux, it is considered like an excitation in EMS.

Page 33: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Analysis Background

19

Assigning a Voltage to a Conductor

In Electrostatic analysis you may assign either a fixed voltage or a floating conductor boundary condition to a

conductor as follows:

Fixed Voltage

Floating Conductor

The floating conductor restraint has an unspecified voltage value. It is treated differently depending whether the capacitance matrix is computed or not. That is, if the capacitance matrix is requested, the simulator assigns 1.0 or 0 V on the floating conductors and computes the matrix using the stored electric energy. On the other hand, if the capacitance matrix is not requested, the floating conductor is treated as an equi-potential entity with unknown voltage value, and thus solved for. Consequently, to treat the voltage on a floating conductor as unknown, the capacitance matrix shall not be requested.

Page 34: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

20

Forces and Torques

The Electrostatic module computes the forces and torques. The following points must be taken into account to

properly compute the force and torques for this type of analysis:

The nodal force distribution is automatically computed for each node of a fixed-voltage conductor.

To plot a nodal force distribution after a successful run, right-click the Force Distribution folder in the

EMS Manager tree.

The rigid body force is computed upon the user request by defining a force set before running the study.

The results for all predefined rigid body force sets are included in the study report and the results table

after a successful run.

Only the Virtual Work method is permissible for this type of analysis.

The floating conductor restraint shall not be used on a conductor if the forces and torques are desired to

be computed.

The nodal force distribution does not necessitate any user input before running the study while the rigid body force does.

Page 35: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Analysis Background

21

Required Input for Electrostatic Analysis

To perform an Electrostatic analysis, you need the following:

Meshed model. You must Mesh the model before running the analysis. Any change in geometry requires re-

meshing.

Material properties: You must specify a relative permittivity (er) for each component or body. The relative

permittivity is defined as:

where

er is the permittivity of the material or some times called the dielectric constant.

eois the permittivity of free space; eo = 8.854x10-12

F/m.

er is a constant real number.

Loads/Restraints. At least one of the following type of loading/restraints: o Fixed voltage o Floating conductor o Charge density o Total Charge

Note: When you create a study, click Properties in the Study dialog box to set the desired options. To modify the properties of an existing study, right-click its icon in the EMS Manager tree and choose Properties.

Page 36: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

22

Performing Electrostatic Analysis

To perform Electrostatic analysis:

1. Create an electrostatic study. To access the Study dialog box, right-click the top icon in the EMS Manager tree and select Study . Define the Properties of the study.

2. Define material for each solid. To define a material for a solid, right-click its icon and select Define/Edit Material. If you have assigned an orthotropic material to a component, right-click the component’s icon and select Coordinate System to specify the coordinate system that defines the main 3 axes of the

material. 3. Right-click the Load/Restraint folder and define at least one. If thermal solution option is on define the

desired thermal boundary conditions. 4. To compute a rigid body force, right-click the Forces/Torques folder and define a force set. 5. Mesh the model and run the study. Before running the study, you can use the Result Options to

request the default plots .

NOTE: If you run a study before meshing it, the program meshes the study automatically before running it. You can also request to run the study by checking Run analysis after meshing in the meshing PropertyManager.

6. View the results:

View potential.

View electric field.

View electric displacement.

View force distribution.

View thermal results if thermal solution is available o View temperature o View temperature gradient o View heat flux

To generate a report, right-click the Report folder and select Define.

To view the results table, right-click the Report folder and select Results Table.

Page 37: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Analysis Background

23

Output of Electrostatic Analysis

The Electrostatic analysis solves for the potential or the voltage inside the model. Once a solution is obtained, the

following additional quantities are computed:

Electric field distribution

Electric displacement distribution

Nodal force distribution

Rigid body force

Capacitance matrix The potential, the electric field, the electric displacement, and the nodal force distributions are displayed on the model at nodes. For each one of these quantities, the following components are available: Electric Field :

Ex: Electric Field in the X direction

Ey: Electric Field in the Y direction

Ez: Electric Field in the Z direction

Er: Resultant Electric Field Electric Displacement:

Dx: Electric Displacement in the X direction

Dy: Electric Displacement in the Y direction

Dz: Electric Displacement in the Z direction

Dr: Resultant Electric Displacement Force Density:

Fx: Force Density in the X direction

Fy: Force Density in the Y direction

Fz: Force Density in the Z direction

Fr: Resultant Force Density Electric potential or voltage The lumped quantities such as capacitance matrix, forces and torques are output to the Report folder where a

report could be generated and a results table could be viewed.

Page 38: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

24

Electric Conduction Analysis

What is Electric Conduction Analysis?

Electric Conduction or the so called current flow analysis belongs to the low-frequency electromagnetic domain or

regime; i.e. displacement currents are neglected. In addition, the fields depend on position only. They do not depend on time. Furthermore, the size of the object is much smaller than the wavelength. Unlike the Electrostatic

analysis which deals with insulators and electric conductors, the Electric Conduction deals with only conducting media which can sustain a current flow. Therefore, all components must have a nonzero electric conductivity.

The conduction equation is obtained from the continuity relation:

Along with the constitutive relation

We obtain

By introducing an electric scalar potential, , and expressing the electric field as:

the famous conduction equation:

is obtained. The Electric Conduction analysis solves the conduction equation.

In the above equations, J is the electric current density, is the electric conductivity, E is the electric field, and is the electric scalar potential.

Applications

Most applications require the computations of the electric current density that defines the current flow and related quantities such as resistance. Applications include:

Page 39: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Analysis Background

25

Electric cables

Resistors

Shunts

Fuses

Electric welding.

Electric Conduction Assumption

The Electric Conduction analysis assumes that there is a current flow in all materials in the model. All materials involved in the conduction analysis must have non-zero electric conductivity. Consequently, unlike most other

electromagnetic analyses, air is not meshed in conduction problems just because air has a zero electric conductivity.

The only material property required is the electric conductivity. The permittivity is not required because

insulators are not allowed in this type of analysis.

Linearity Assumption

The relationship between electric field and the current density is linear requiring all materials in the model to have a linear electric conductivity.

Page 40: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

26

Material Properties

For Electric Conduction analysis, each component or body must be assigned an electric conductivity. This quantity is just a real number for isotropic materials. It can also be a tensor that varies with direction for orthotropic materials.

How about the permittivity? You do not need to specify the permittivity of any part for this analysis type. The Electric Conduction analysis assumes a current flow in all components and no insulators are permitted.

Page 41: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Analysis Background

27

Applicable Restraints

In the Electric Conduction analysis you may assign either a fixed voltage or a contact resistance restraints as

follows:

Fixed Voltage

Contact Resistance

The fixed voltage is the most commonly used for this type of analysis. Whereas the contact resistance is rarely used.

Remember that the units of the contact resistance is Ohms per square.

Page 42: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

28

Resistance Calculation

The Electric Conduction module computes the resistance. The resistance is defined as:

The resistance is calculated as follows:

Calculating Resistance

All resistance sets must be defined before running the study.

Page 43: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Analysis Background

29

Required Input for Electric Conduction Analysis

To perform an Electric Conduction analysis, you need the following:

Meshed model. You must Mesh the model before running the analysis. Any change in geometry requires re-

meshing.

Material properties: You must specify a non-zero electric conductivity for each component or body.

Loads/Restraints. You must specify at least one Fixed voltage

To get a non-trivial solution, at least one of the fixed voltages must be non-zero.

Page 44: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

30

Performing Electric Conduction Analysis

To perform Electric Conduction analysis:

1. Create a static study. To access the Study dialog box, right-click the top icon in the EMS Manager tree and select Study . Define the Properties of the study.

2. Define material for each solid. To define a material for a solid, right-click its icon and select Define/Edit Material. If you have assigned an orthotropic material to a component, right-click the component’s icon and select Coordinate System to specify the coordinate system that defines the main 3 axes of the

material. 3. Right-click the Load/Restraint folder and define at least one. If thermal solution option is on define the

desired thermal boundary conditions. 4. To compute resistance, right-click the Resistance Settings folder and define a resistance set. 5. Mesh the model and run the study. Before running the study, you can use the Result Options to

request the default plots .

NOTE: If you run a study before meshing it, the program meshes the study automatically before running it. You can also request to run the study by checking Run analysis after meshing in the meshing PropertyManager.

6. View the results:

View potential.

View electric field.

View electric current density.

View thermal results if thermal solution is available o View temperature o View temperature gradient o View heat flux

To generate a report, right-click the Report folder and select Define.

To view the results table, right-click the Report folder and select Results Table.

Page 45: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Analysis Background

31

Output of Electric Conduction Analysis

The Electric Conduction analysis solves for the potential or the voltage inside the model. Once a solution is

obtained, the following additional quantities are computed:

Electric field distribution

Electric current density

Resistance The potential, the electric field, and the electric current density are displayed on the model at nodes. For each one of these quantities, the following components are available: Electric Field :

Ex: Electric Field in the X direction

Ey: Electric Field in the Y direction

Ez: Electric Field in the Z direction

Er: Resultant Electric Field Electric Current Density:

Jx: Electric Current Density in the X direction

Jy: Electric Current Density in the Y direction

Jz: Electric Current Density in the Z direction

Jr: Resultant Electric Current Density Electric potential or voltage Notice: In case of Motion analysis option is turned on: For each one of the above quantities, results are available

at each motion time step Thermal Output Results (Available when Thermal Solution is on )

The lumped quantities such as resistance and dissipated power are output to the Report folder where a report

could be generated and a results table could be viewed.

Page 46: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

32

Magnetostatic Analysis

What is Magnetostatic Analysis?

Magnetostatic or the so called DC Magnetic Field analysis belongs to the low-frequency electromagnetic domain

or regime; i.e. displacement currents are neglected. In addition, the fields depend on position only. They do not depend on time. Furthermore, the size of the object is much smaller than the wavelength.

The Magnetostatic Analysis, linear and non-linear, calculates the magnetic fields produced by one the following:

A Permanent magnet.

A steady DC electric current.

Maxwell’s equations relevant to magnetostatic analysis fields are:

where H is the magnetic field, Js is the source current density, and B is the magnetic flux density. The constitutive relation connects B and H:

where m is the magnetic permeability, in general a function of H. Hc is the coercive force or coercivity. Thus the

Magnetostatic Analysis solves the above two Maxwell’s equations

Applications

This type of analysis does not consider time-dependent effects such as eddy currents. It has many applications, including:

DC machines

Permanent magnets

Motors

Generators

Actuators

Magnetic recording

Magnetic levitation devices

Magnetic levitation devices

Lossless Assumption

All materials are lossless which implies real magnetic permeability in all material regions. As a result, all magnetic field and magnetic flux density are real.

Page 47: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Analysis Background

33

Page 48: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

34

Material Properties

For Magnetostatic analysis, the following issues should be taken into consideration:

Linear isotropic

Linear orthotropic

Nonlinear isotropic

Permanent magnets

Electric conductivity

Linear Isotropic

For linear isotropic materials, a relative magnetic permeability must be specified for each component or body which is just a real number larger or equal to 1.0.

Linear Orthotropic

For linear orthotropic materials, a relative magnetic permeability must be specified for each of the three principal axes of the material. In addition, a local coordinate system must be specified if different from the global coordinate system.

Nonlinear Isotropic

Most of ferromagnetic materials exhibit a nonlinearity behavior where the permeability is function of the magnetic field H. Practically, material manufactures provide a B-H or a magnetization curve that gives the magnetic flux B as a function of H. From such curve, the permeability is extracted. The user could input the B-H curve in MKS units

(B in T and H in A/m) or Gaussian units (B in Gauss and H in Oersted).

Permanent Magnets

Permanent magnets or the so called hard magnetic materials have a special treatment for this type of

analysis. That is, depending on whether the material is linear or nonlinear, the following quantities must be specified:

Material is nonlinear: Just specify a B-H curve that start in the second quadrant where the first point must be (-coercivity, 0) and the maximum magnetic flux density represents the remanence.

Material is linear: specify either the relative magnetic permeability and the coercivity or the remanence and the coercivity.

Electric Conductivity

In addition to the above mentioned magnetic permeability , an electric conductivity must be assigned to all coils.

Nonlinear orthotropic materials are not supported.

Page 49: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Analysis Background

35

Applicable Boundary Conditions

The only applicable restraint or boundary condition for the Magnetostatic analysis is the Normal Flux type. All outer faces have the default Tangential Flux type.

Page 50: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

36

Forces and Torques

The Magnetostatic module computes the forces and torques. The following points must be taken into account to

properly compute the force and torques for this type of analysis:

The nodal force distribution is automatically computed for each node of all ferromagnetic and conducting components.

To plot a nodal force distribution after a successful run, right-click the Force Distribution folder in the

EMS Manager tree.

The rigid body force is computed upon the user request by defining a force set before running the study.

The results for all predefined rigid body force sets are included in the study report and the results table

after a successful run.

The Virtual Work method is the preferred method for ferromagnetic materials whereas the Lorentz Force method is the preferred method for coils.

The nodal force distribution does not necessitate any user input before running the study while the rigid body force does.

Page 51: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Analysis Background

37

Required Input for Magnetostatic Analysis

To perform a Magnetostatic analysis, you need the following:

Meshed model. You must Mesh the model before running the analysis. Any change in geometry requires re-

meshing.

Material properties: Depending on the material, the following must be specified: o Linear isotropic: A relative magnetic permeability must be specified for each component or body which

is just a real number larger or equal to 1.0. o Linear orthotropic: A relative magnetic permeability must be specified for each of the three principal

axes of the material. In addition, a local coordinate system must be specified if different from the global

coordinate system. o Nonlinear isotropic: A B-H curve must be specified. o A permanent magnet: Specify either the relative magnetic permeability and the coercivity or the

remanence and the coercivity. Specify also the direction of coercivity. o A coil: In addition to the magnetic permeability , an electric conductivity must be assigned to all coils.

o Loads/Restraints. At least one Normal Flux boundary restraints must be specified. o Coils: Specify the coil properties.

To get a non-trivial solution, at least one coil or a permanent magnet must be defined for a Magnetostatic study.

Page 52: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

38

Performing Magnetostatic Analysis

To perform a Magnetostatic analysis:

1. Create a magnetostatic study. To access the Study dialog box, right-click the top icon in the EMS Manager tree and select Study . Define the Properties of the study..

2. Define material for each solid. To define a material for a solid, right-click its icon and select Define/Edit Material. Additional steps may be needed:

If you have assigned an orthotropic material to a component, right-click the component’s icon and select Coordinate System to specify the coordinate system that defines the main 3 axes of

the material.

If you have assigned a permanent magnet to a component, right-click the component’s icon and select Direction of Coercivity to define the preferred direction of the permanent magnet

and the local coordinate system if applicable. 3. Right-click the Load/Restraint folder and define at least one Normal Flux. If thermal solution option is

on define the desired thermal boundary conditions. 4. To compute a rigid body force, right-click the Forces/Torques folder and define a force set. 5. Define all applicable coils. 6. Mesh the model and run the study. Before running the study, you can use the Result Options to

request the default plots .

NOTE: If you run a study before meshing it, the program meshes the study automatically before running it. You can also request to run the study by checking Run analysis after meshing in the meshing PropertyManager.

6. View the results:

View magnetic field.

View magnetic flux density.

View applied current density.

View force distribution.

View thermal results if thermal solution is available o View temperature o View temperature gradient o View heat flux

To generate a report, right-click the Report folder and select Define.

To view the results table, right-click the Report folder and select Results Table.

Page 53: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Analysis Background

39

Output of Magnetostatic Analysis

The Magnetostatic analysis solves for the magnetic field inside the model. Once a solution is obtained, the

following additional quantities are computed:

Magnetic field distribution

Magnetic flux density distribution

Applied current density

Nodal force distribution

Electric Field

Rigid body force

Inductance matrix The magnetic field, the magnetic flux density, the nodal force, the electric field and the current density distributions are displayed on the model at nodes. For each one of these quantities, the following components are available: Magnetic Field :

Hx: Magnetic Field in the X direction

Hy: Magnetic Field in the Y direction

Hz: Magnetic Field in the Z direction

Hr: Resultant Magnetic Field Magnetic Flux Density:

Bx: Magnetic Flux Density in the X direction

By: Magnetic Flux Density in the Y direction

Bz: Magnetic Flux Density in the Z direction

Br: Resultant Magnetic Flux Density Applied Current Density:

Jax: Applied Current Density in the X direction

Jay: Applied Current Density in the Y direction

Jaz: Applied Current Density in the Z direction

Jar: Resultant Applied Current Density Force Density:

Fx: Force Density in the X direction

Fy: Force Density in the Y direction

Fz: Force Density in the Z direction

Fr: Resultant Force Density Electric Field :

Ex: Electric Field in the X direction

Ey: Electric Field in the Y direction

Ez: Electric Field in the Z direction

Er: Resultant Electric Field Flux:

Compute a single flux value at a given selected entities.

Notice: In case of Motion analysis option is turned on: For each one of the above quantities, results are available

at each motion time step Thermal Output Results (Available when Thermal Solution is on )

The lumped quantities such as inductance matrix, magnetic energy, flux linkage, forces and torques are output to the Report folder where a report could be generated and a results table could be viewed.

Page 54: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

40

AC Magnetic Analysis

What is AC Magnetic Analysis?

The AC Magnetic or the so called time harmonic magnetic analysis belongs to the low-frequency electromagnetic domain or regime; i.e. displacement currents are neglected. In addition, the fields have a time

harmonic, i.e. ejt

, time dependence.

The AC Magnetic Analysis calculates the effects of alternating currents (AC) in electromagnetic devices. These effects include:

Eddy currents

Skin effects

Power loss due to eddy currents

Maxwell’s equations relevant to AC Magnetic analysis fields are:

where E is the electric field, and B is the magnetic flux density. The constitutive relation connects J and E:

where is the electric conductivity. Thus the AC Magnetic Analysis solves the above two Maxwell’s equations

Applications

Applications include:

Transformers

Electric motors

Induction machines

Eddy-current braking systems

Induction heating

Circuit breakers

Linearity Assumption

The relationship between magnetic flux density and magnetic field is linear requiring all materials in the model to have a linear magnetic permeability. Thus, no B-H curves are allowed for AC Magnetic analysis.

Permanent Magnets

Permanent magnets are not allowed for AC Magnetic analysis.

Page 55: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Analysis Background

41

Page 56: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

42

Skin Depth Calculation

A very important quantity that shall be computed for any AC Magnetic study is Skin Depth, which gives an indication about the penetration of the field in the conducting regions. It is given by

Where m is the magnetic permeability in H/m, s is the electric conductivity in S/m, and f is the frequency in Hz.

For example, for an Aluminum plate where m = m0, s = 3.526x107 S/m at a frequency = 50 Hz, d = 11.98 mm

The Skin in Depth is a measure of how deep the field penetrates the conductor. Therefore, the higher is the frequency the shallower is the penetration.

Why is the calculation of the Skin Depth important?

It is important for two main reasons:

Reason 1:

It gives us an indicator of whether the problem at hand must be treated with the AC Magnetic analysis or it is sufficient to use the Magnetostatic analysis.

The rule of thumb for this type of decision is:

If the ratio of the thickness of the conductor to the Skin Depth in that conductor is less than one, then the problem is resistance limited and can be treated as a magnetostatic problem.

if the ratio is larger or equal to one, then the problem must be treated with AC Magnetic analysis.

o If d/ < 1, then Magnetostatic is sufficient.

o If d/ >=1, Must use AC Magnetic analysis

Nevertheless, we can still use the AC Magnetic even if d/ < 1; the opposite is not true.

Reason 2:

It gives an indication of how to mesh inside a conductor. For the first skin depth penetration from the surface of the

conductor, the mesh must have at least two elements per skin depth. Beyond the first skin depth penetration, the mesh could be made coarser but that may require splitting the conducting region to more components for mesh control purposes. This process of splitting the first skin depth volume to a separate part out of the overall conductor may be worthwhile if the conducting region is several skin depth deep and which may lead to a huge mesh if it were meshed uniformly with a mesh size of at least two elements/skin depth.

Page 57: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Analysis Background

43

Material Properties

For AC Magnetic analysis, the following issues should be taken into consideration:

Linear isotropic

Linear orthotropic

Nonlinear materials

Permanent magnets

Electric conductivity

Linear Isotropic

For linear isotropic materials, a relative magnetic permeability must be specified for each component or body.

Linear Orthotropic

For linear orthotropic materials, a relative magnetic permeability must be specified for each of the three principal axes of the material. In addition, a local coordinate system must be specified if different from the global coordinate system.

Nonlinear Materials

Nonlinear materials are not allowed for the AC Magnetic analysis.

Permanent Magnets

Permanent Magnets are not allowed for the AC Magnetic analysis.

Electric Conductivity

In addition to the above mentioned magnetic permeability , an electric conductivity must be assigned for each

conducting component or body. If a component has a non zero conductivity, it supports eddy currents. However, wound coils in spite of their electric conductivity, they do not support eddy currents because the wire turns are too thin and isolated with some form of insulators. On the other hand, solid coils do support eddy currents and exhibit skin effects.

Remember that wound coils do not support eddy currents, whereas solid coils do.

Page 58: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

44

Applicable Boundary Conditions

The only applicable restraint or boundary condition for the AC Magnetic analysis is the Normal Flux type. All outer faces have the default Tangential Flux type.

Page 59: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Analysis Background

45

Forces and Torques

The AC Magnetic module computes the forces and torques. The following points must be taken into account to

properly compute the force and torques for this type of analysis:

The nodal force distribution is automatically computed for each node of all ferromagnetic and conducting components.

To plot a nodal force distribution after a successful run, right-click the Force Distribution folder in the

EMS Manager tree.

The rigid body force is computed upon the user request by defining a force set before running the study.

The results for all predefined rigid body force sets are included in the study report and the results table

after a successful run.

The Virtual Work method is the preferred method for ferromagnetic materials whereas the Lorentz Force method is the preferred method for coils.

The nodal force distribution does not necessitate any user input before running the study while the rigid body force does.

Page 60: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

46

Required Input for AC Magnetic Analysis

To perform an AC Magnetic analysis, you need the following:

Meshed model. You must Mesh the model before running the analysis. Any change in geometry requires re-

meshing.

Material properties: A relative magnetic permeability and an electric conductivity must be specified for

each component or body.

Loads/Restraints. At least one Normal Flux boundary restraints must be specified.

Coils: Specify the coil properties. Remember that wound coils do not support eddy currents, whereas solid coils do.

To get a non-trivial solution, at least one coil must be defined for an AC Magnetic study.

Page 61: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Analysis Background

47

Performing AC Magnetic Analysis

To perform an AC Magnetic analysis:

1. Create an AC Magnetic study. To access the Study dialog box, right-click the top icon in the EMS Manager tree and select Study . Define the Properties of the study..

2. Define material for each solid. To define a material for a solid, right-click its icon and select Define/Edit Material. Additional steps may be needed:

If you have assigned an orthotropic material to a component, right-click the component’s icon and select Coordinate System to specify the coordinate system that defines the main 3 axes of

the material. 3. Right-click the Load/Restraint folder and define at least one Normal Flux. If thermal solution option is

on define the desired thermal boundary conditions. 4. To compute a rigid body force, right-click the Forces/Torques folder and define a force set. 5. Define all applicable coils. Remember that wound coils do not support eddy currents, whereas solid

coils do. 6. Mesh the model and run the study. Before running the study, you can use the Result Options to

request the default plots .

NOTE: If you run a study before meshing it, the program meshes the study automatically before running it. You can also request to run the study by checking Run analysis after meshing in the meshing PropertyManager.

6. At each t phase , the following results are available: :

View magnetic field.

View magnetic flux density.

View applied current density.

View eddy current density.

View force distribution.

View thermal results if thermal solution is available o View temperature o View temperature gradient o View heat flux

To generate a report, right-click the Report folder and select Define.

To view the results table, right-click the Report folder and select Results Table.

Page 62: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

48

Output of AC Magnetic Analysis

The AC Magnetic analysis solves for the magnetic field inside the model. Once a solution is obtained, the

following additional quantities are computed:

Magnetic field distribution

Magnetic flux density distribution

Applied current density

Eddy current density

Nodal force distribution

Electric Field

Flux

Rigid body force

Inductance matrix The magnetic field, the magnetic flux density,the electric field, the nodal force, and the current density distributions

are displayed on the model at nodes. All quantities have a ejt

time dependence. Except for the nodal force, all other quantities are complex. For each one of these quantities, the following components are available: Magnetic Field :

Hx: Magnetic Field in the X direction

Hy: Magnetic Field in the Y direction

Hz: Magnetic Field in the Z direction

Hr: Resultant Magnetic Field Magnetic Flux Density:

Bx: Magnetic Flux Density in the X direction

By: Magnetic Flux Density in the Y direction

Bz: Magnetic Flux Density in the Z direction

Br: Resultant Magnetic Flux Density Applied Current Density:

Jax: Applied Current Density in the X direction

Jay: Applied Current Density in the Y direction

Jaz: Applied Current Density in the Z direction

Jar: Resultant Applied Current Density Current Density:

Jex: Current Density in the X direction

Jey: Current Density in the Y direction

Jez: Current Density in the Z direction

Jer: Resultant Current Density Force Density:

Fx: Force Density in the X direction

Fy: Force Density in the Y direction

Fz: Force Density in the Z direction

Fr: Resultant Force Density Electric Field (E) :

Ex: Electric Field in the X direction

Ey: Electric Field in the Y direction

Ez: Electric Field in the Z direction

Er: Resultant Electric Field Losses Density : is available only if analysis property Split Core Loss option is checked

Ohmic Loss

Eddy Loss

Hysteresis Loss

Excess Loss

Core Loss Flux:

Page 63: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Analysis Background

49

Compute a single flux value at a given selected entities.

Voltage:

Compute a single voltage value at a given selected two point entities. Notice: In case of Motion analysis option is turned on: For each one of the above quantities, results are available

at each motion time step Thermal Output Results (Available when Thermal Solution is on )

The lumped quantities such as inductance matrix, magnetic energy, flux linkage, power loss in conducting regions, forces and torques are output to the Report folder where a report could be generated and a results table could be

viewed.

Page 64: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

50

Transient Magnetic Analysis

What is Transient Magnetic Analysis?

The Transient Magnetostatic analysis belongs to the low-frequency electromagnetic domain or regime; i.e.

displacement currents are neglected. It calculates magnetic fields that vary over time. These fields are typically caused by surges in currents or voltages. This type of analysis can be linear or non-linear. It also addresses eddy currents, power losses and magnetic forces.

The pertinent Maxwell’s equations for this type of analysis:

where E is the electric field, and B is the magnetic flux density.

The constitutive relation that connects B and H:

where m is the magnetic permeability, in general a function of H. Hc is the coercive force or coercivity

The constitutive relation that connects J and E:

where is the electric conductivity.

Applications

Typical applications of this analysis include:

Rotating machines

Linear actuators

Linear motors

Magnetic recording

Speakers

Nondestructive testing

Page 65: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Analysis Background

51

The Transient Magnetic analysis is truly the most general among all the available analyses. Below are some features of the analysis:

The time dependence of the excitation is arbitrary. It must be described via a curve called the Current-Time curve.

The materials may be linear or nonlinear.

Permanent magnets are supported.

The skin effects and eddy currents are included.

Page 66: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

52

Material Properties

For Transient Magnetic analysis, the following issues should be taken into consideration:

Linear isotropic

Linear orthotropic

Nonlinear isotropic

Permanent magnets

Electric conductivity

Linear Isotropic

For linear isotropic materials, a relative magnetic permeability must be specified for each component or body which is just a real number larger or equal to 1.0.

Linear Orthotropic

For linear orthotropic materials, a relative magnetic permeability must be specified for each of the three principal axes of the material. In addition, a local coordinate system must be specified if different from the global coordinate system.

Nonlinear Isotropic

Most of ferromagnetic materials exhibit a nonlinearity behavior where the permeability is function of the magnetic field H. Practically, material manufactures provide a B-H or a magnetization curve that gives the magnetic flux B as a function of H. From such curve, the permeability is extracted. The user could input the B-H curve in MKS units

(B in T and H in A/m) or Gaussian units (B in Gauss and H in Oersted).

Permanent Magnets

Permanent magnets or the so called hard magnetic materials have a special treatment for this type of

analysis. That is, depending on whether the material is linear or nonlinear, the following quantities must be specified:

Material is nonlinear: Just specify a B-H curve that start in the second quadrant where the first point must be (-coercivity, 0) and the maximum magnetic flux density represents the remanence.

Material is linear: specify either the relative magnetic permeability and the coercivity or the remanence and the coercivity.

Electric Conductivity

In addition to the above mentioned magnetic permeability , an electric conductivity must be assigned for each

conducting component or body. If a component has a non zero conductivity, it supports eddy currents. However, wound coils in spite of their electric conductivity, they do not support eddy currents because the wire turns are too thin and isolated with some form of insulators. On the other hand, solid coils do support eddy currents and exhibit skin effects.

Nonlinear orthotropic materials are not supported.

Page 67: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Analysis Background

53

Page 68: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

54

Applicable Boundary Conditions

The only applicable restraint or boundary condition for the Transient Magnetic analysis is the Normal Flux type. All outer faces have the default Tangential Flux type.

Page 69: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Analysis Background

55

Forces and Torques

The Transient Magnetic module computes the forces and torques. The following points must be taken into

account to properly compute the force and torques for this type of analysis:

The nodal force distribution is automatically computed for each node of all ferromagnetic and conducting components.

To plot a nodal force distribution after a successful run, right-click the Force Distribution folder in the

EMS Manager tree.

The rigid body force is computed upon the user request by defining a force set before running the study.

The results for all predefined rigid body force sets are included in the study report and the results table

after a successful run.

The Virtual Work method is the preferred method for ferromagnetic materials whereas the Lorentz Force method is the preferred method for coils.

The nodal force distribution does not necessitate any user input before running the study while the rigid body force does.

The forces and torques are time dependent. Before viewing the results, choose the desired time.

Page 70: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

56

Required Input for Transient Magnetic Analysis

To perform a Transient Magnetic analysis, you need the following:

Meshed model. You must Mesh the model before running the analysis. Any change in geometry requires re-

meshing.

Material properties: Depending on the material, the following must be specified: o Linear isotropic: A relative magnetic permeability must be specified for each component or body which

is just a real number larger or equal to 1.0. o Linear orthotropic: A relative magnetic permeability must be specified for each of the three principal

axes of the material. In addition, a local coordinate system must be specified if different from the global

coordinate system. o Nonlinear isotropic: A B-H curve must be specified. o A permanent magnet: Specify either the relative magnetic permeability and the coercivity or the

remanence and the coercivity. Specify also the direction of coercivity. o A coil: In addition to the magnetic permeability , an electric conductivity must be assigned to all coils.

o Loads/Restraints. At least one Normal Flux boundary restraints must be specified. o Coils: Specify the coil properties. Remember that wound coils do not support eddy currents, whereas

solid coils do.

To get a non-trivial solution, at least one coil or a permanent magnet must be defined for a Transient Magnetic study.

Page 71: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Analysis Background

57

Performing Transient Magnetic Analysis

To perform a Transient Magnetic analysis:

1. Create a Transient Magnetic study. To access the Study dialog box, right-click the top icon in the EMS Manager tree and select Study . Define the Properties of the study..

2. Define material for each solid. To define a material for a solid, right-click its icon and select Define/Edit Material. Additional steps may be needed:

If you have assigned an orthotropic material to a component, right-click the component’s icon and select Coordinate System to specify the coordinate system that defines the main 3 axes of

the material.

If you have assigned a permanent magnet to a component, right-click the component’s icon and select Direction of Coercivity to define the preferred direction of the permanent magnet

and the local coordinate system if applicable. 3. Right-click the Load/Restraint folder and define at least one Normal Flux. 4. To compute a rigid body force, right-click the Forces/Torques folder and define a force set. 5. Define all applicable coils. Remember that wound coils do not support eddy currents, whereas solid

coils do. 6. Mesh the model and run the study. Before running the study, you can use the Result Options to

request the default plots .

NOTE: If you run a study before meshing it, the program meshes the study automatically before running it. You can also request to run the study by checking Run analysis after meshing in the meshing PropertyManager.

6. At each time step, the following results are available:

View magnetic field.

View magnetic flux density.

View applied current density.

View eddy current density

View force distribution.

To generate a report, right-click the Report folder and select Define.

To view the results table, right-click the Report folder and select Results Table.

Page 72: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

58

Output of Transient Magnetic Analysis

The Transient Magnetic analysis solves for the magnetic field inside the model. Once a solution is obtained, the

following additional quantities are computed at each time step:

Magnetic field distribution

Magnetic flux density distribution

Applied current density

Eddy current density

Nodal force distribution

Rigid body force

Inductance matrix The magnetic field, the magnetic flux density, the nodal force, and the current density distributions are displayed on the model at nodes. For each one of these quantities, the following components are available at each time step:: Notice: In case of Motion analysis option is turned on: the time step is the motion time step

Magnetic Field :

Hx: Magnetic Field in the X direction

Hy: Magnetic Field in the Y direction

Hz: Magnetic Field in the Z direction

Hr: Resultant Magnetic Field Magnetic Flux Density:

Bx: Magnetic Flux Density in the X direction

By: Magnetic Flux Density in the Y direction

Bz: Magnetic Flux Density in the Z direction

Br: Resultant Magnetic Flux Density Applied Current Density:

Jax: Applied Current Density in the X direction

Jay: Applied Current Density in the Y direction

Jaz: Applied Current Density in the Z direction

Jar: Resultant Applied Current Density Current Density:

Jex: Current Density in the X direction

Jey: Current Density in the Y direction

Jez: Current Density in the Z direction

Jer: Resultant Current Density Force Density:

Fx: Force Density in the X direction

Fy: Force Density in the Y direction

Fz: Force Density in the Z direction

Fr: Resultant Force Density Flux:

Compute a single flux value at a given selected entities.

Thermal Output Results (Available when Thermal Solution is on )

The lumped quantities such as inductance, magnetic energy, flux linkage, power loss in conducting regions, forces and torques are output to the Report folder where a report could be generated and a results table could be

Page 73: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Analysis Background

59

viewed. However, the inductance and flux linkage are viewable only if the total number of coils is equal one. In future releases, the inductance matrix will be available for N coils.

Page 74: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

60

Thermal Analysis

What is Thermal Analysis?

There are two mechanisms of heat transfer. These mechanisms are:

Conduction

Convection

Thermal analysis calculates the temperature distribution in a body due to one or both of these mechanisms. In both cases, heat energy flows from the medium with higher temperature to the medium with lower temperature. Heat transfer by conduction and convection requires the presence of an intervening medium while heat transfer by a third mechanism, (radiation, which is not currently supported in EMS) does not.

In EMS all heat sources are due to electric current flowing in non-perfect conductors. In theses cases, Joule heating is generated and acts as a heat source. Therefore, thermal analysis in EMS must always follow an electromagnetic analysis so that the heat sources in the model are automatically pre-computed. By default, thermal coupling is not enabled on any of the electromagnetic studies and the user must explicitly turn it on to perform thermal analysis.

Page 75: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Analysis Background

61

Performing Thermal Analysis

To perform Thermal analysis:

1. Thermal analysis is not a standalone EMS analysis type but must be preceded by an electromagnetic analysis. Thermal analysis is coupled to all EMS analysis types except for the Transient Magnetic analysis, i.e., it is coupled to Electrostatics, Electric Conduction, Magnetostatics, and AC Magnetics.

2. To couple thermal analysis to your electromagnetic analysis of a given study:

Right-click the desired study's folder and select Properties. The study properties page is

displayed.

Check the Steady State Thermal checkbox.

3. Continue the usual steps of performing your electromagnetic analysis. 4. Make sure that all materials have their proper thermal conductivity values defined (you may need to

change the default values). 5. Make sure to add to the proper thermal boundary conditions under the Load/Restraint. 6. A thermal solution will be automatically computed after the electromagnetic analysis is completed and the

corresponding thermal results folders will be generated.

Page 76: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

62

Output of Thermal Analysis

After running a study with the thermal solution option on, you can view the following thermal quantities(in case of transient the results will be available at each transient time step:

Temperature

Temperature distribution Temperature Gradient :

TGx: Temperature gradient in the X direction

TGy: Temperature gradient in the Y direction

TGz: Temperature gradient in the Z direction

TGr: Resultant Temperature gradient Heat Flux :

FLx: Heat Flux in the X direction

FLy: Heat Flux in the Y direction

FLz: Heat Fluxin the Z direction

FLr: Heat Flux gradient

where:

X, Y, and Z refer to the global coordinate system. If you choose a reference geometry, these directions refer to the selected reference entity.

Notice: In case of Motion analysis option is turned on: For each one of the above quantities, results are available

at each motion time step

Page 77: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Analysis Background

63

Mechanisms of Heat Transfer

Page 78: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

64

Conduction

Conduction

Conduction is the heat transfer mechanism in which thermal energy transfers from one point to another through the interaction between the atoms or molecules of the matter. Conduction occurs in solids, liquids, and gasses.

Conduction does not involve any bulk motion of matter. Gases transfer heat by direct collisions between energetic molecules, and their thermal conductivity is low compared to solids since they are dilute media. The conduction of energy in liquids is the same as in gases except that the situation is considerably more complex since the molecules are more closely spaced and molecular force fields exert a strong influence on the energy exchange in the collision process. Nonmetallic solids transfer heat by lattice vibrations so there is no motion of the media as heat propagates through. Metals are better conductors than nonmetals at normal temperatures because they have free electrons that carry thermal energy.

The heat transfer by conduction obeys Fourier's law which states that the rate of heat conduction Qconduction is

proportional to the heat transfer area (A) and the temperature gradient (dT/dx), or:

Qconduction = - K A ( dT/dx)

where K, the thermal conductivity, measures the ability of a material to conduct heat. The units of K are W/moC or

(Btu/s)/inoF. The conversion between different unit systems is as follows: 1 W/(mK) = 1 W/(m

oC) = 0.85984 kcal/(hr

moC) = 0.5779 Btu/(ft hr

oF)

For the planar layer shown below, the rate of heat conduction is given by,

Qconduction = - K A ( THot - TCold )/L

The following figure shows ranges for the thermal conductivity values for liquids, nonmetallic solids, and pure metals at normal temperature and pressure.

Page 79: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Analysis Background

65

Thermal conductivity (K) for some materials

The following table lists thermal conductivities (in W/m.oK) for selected materials at room temperature (25oC):

Material K

(W/m.oK)

Copper 401

Aluminum 250

Silver 429

Gold 310

Steel 46

Stainless Steel

16

Lead 35

Platinum 70

Zinc 116

Silicon 112

Click here for a more complete list of thermal conductivity values of different materials.

Page 80: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

66

List of thermal conductivity values of different materials

The following table lists thermal conductivities (in W/m.oK) for selected materials at room temperature (25oC):

1 W/(mK) = 1 W/(moC) = 0.85984 kcal/(hr moC) = 0.5779 Btu/(ft hr oF)

Material K (W/m.oK)

Acetone 0.16

Acrylic 0.2

Air 0.024

Alcohol 0.17

Aluminum 250

Aluminum Oxide 30

Ammonia 0.022

Antimony 18.5

Argon 0.016

Asbestos-cement board 0.744

Asbestos-cement sheets 0.166

Asbestos-cement 2.07

Asbestos, loosely packed 0.15

Asbestos mill board 0.14

Asphalt 0.75

Balsa 0.048

Bitumen 0.17

Benzene 0.16

Beryllium 218

Page 81: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Analysis Background

67

Brass 109

Brick dense 1.31

Brick work 0.69

Cadmium 92

Carbon 1.7

Cement, portland 0.29

Cement, mortar 1.73

Chalk 0.09

Cobalt 0.9

Concrete, light 0.42

Concrete, stone 1.7

Constantan 22

Copper 401

Corian (ceramic filled) 1.06

Corkboard 0.043

Cork, regranulated 0.044

Cork, ground 0.043

Cotton 0.03

Carbon Steel 54

Cotton Wool insulation 0.029

Diatomaceous earth (Sil-o-cel) 0.06

Earth, dry 1.5

Ether 0.14

Epoxy 0.35

Page 82: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

68

Felt insulation 0.04

Fiberglass 0.04

Fiber insulating board 0.048

Fiber hardboard 0.2

Fireclay brick 500oC 1.4

Foam Glass 0.042

Gasoline 0.15

Glass 1.05

Glass, Pearls, dry 0.18

Glass, Pearls, saturated 0.76

Class, window 0.96

Glass, wool Insulation 0.04

Glycerol 0.28

Gold 310

Granite 1.7 - 4.0

Gypsum or plaster board 0.17

Hairfelt 0.05

Hardboard high density 0.15

Hardwoods (oak, maple..) 0.16

Helium 0.142

Hydrogen 0.168

Ice (0oC, 32oF) 2.18

Insulation materials 0.035 - 0.16

Iridium 147

Page 83: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Analysis Background

69

Iron 80

Iron, wrought 59

Iron, cast 55

Kapok insulation 0.034

Kerosene 0.15

Lead Pb 35

Leather, dry 0.14

Limestone 1.26 - 1.33

Magnesia insulation (85%) 0.07

Magnesium 156

Marble 2.6

Mercury 8

Methane 0.030

Methanol 0.21

Mica 0.71

Mineral wool blanket 0.04

Molybdenum 138

Monel 26

Nickel 91

Nitrogen 0.024

Nylon 6 0.25

Oil, machine 0.15

Olive oil 0.17

Oxygen 0.024

Page 84: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

70

Paper 0.05

Paraffin Wax 0.25

Perlite, atmospheric pressure 0.031

Perlite, vacuum 0.00137

Plaster, gypsum 0.48

Plaster, metal lath 0.47

Plaster, wood lath 0.28

Plastics, foamed 0.03

Platinum 70

Plywood 0.13

Polyethylene HD 0.42 - 0.51

Polypropylene 0.1 - 0.22

Polystyrene expanded 0.03

Porcelain 1.5

PTFE 0.25

PVC 0.19

Pyrex glass 1.005

Quarts mineral 3

Rock Wool insulation 0.045

Sand, dry 0.35

Sand, saturated 2.7

Sandstone 1.7

Sawdust 0.08

Silica aerogel 0.02

Page 85: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Analysis Background

71

Silicon 112

Silicone oil 0.1

Silver 429

Snow (temp < 0oC) 0.05 - 0.25

Sodium 84

Softwoods (fir, pine ..) 0.12

Steel 46

Stainless Steel 16

Straw insulation 0.09

Styrofoam 0.033

Tin Sn 67

Zinc Zn 116

Urethane foam 0.021

Vermiculite 0.058

Vinyl ester 0.25

Water 0.58

Water, vapor (steam) 0.016

Wood across the grain, white pine

0.12

Wood across the grain, balsa 0.055

Wood across the grain, yellow pine

0.147

Wood, oak 0.17

Wool, felt 0.07

Page 86: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

72

Convection

Convection

Convection is the heat transfer mode in which heat transfers between a solid face and an adjacent moving fluid (or gas). Convection has two elements:

Energy transfer due to random molecular motion (diffusion), and

Energy transfer by bulk or macroscopic motion of the fluid (advection).

The mechanism of convection can be explained as follows: as the layer of the fluid adjacent to the hot surface becomes warmer, its density decreases (at constant pressure, density is inversely proportional to the temperature) and becomes buoyant. A cooler (heavier) fluid near the surface replaces the warmer fluid and a pattern of circulation forms.

The rate of heat exchange between a fluid of temperature Tf and a face of a solid of area A at temperature Ts obeys the Newton's law of cooling which can be written as:

Qconvection = h A (Ts - Tf)

where h is the convection heat transfer coefficient. The units of h are W/m2K or Btu/s in

2F. The convection heat

transfer coefficient (h) depends on fluid motion, geometry, and thermodynamic and physical properties.

Generally, there are two modes convection heat transfer:

Natural (Free) Convection

The motion of the fluid adjacent to a solid face is caused by buoyancy forces induced by changes in the density of the fluid due to differences in temperature between the solid and the fluid. When a hot plate is left to cool down in the air the particles of air adjacent to the face of the plate get warmer, their density decreases, and hence they move upward.

Forced Convection

An external means such as a fan or a pump is used to accelerate the flow of the fluid over the face of the solid. The rapid motion of the fluid particles over the face of the solid maximizes the temperature gradient and increases the rate of heat exchange. In the following image, air is forced over a hot plate.

Page 87: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Analysis Background

73

Convection Heat Coefficient

Newton's law of cooling states that the heat transfer rate leaving a surface at temperature Ts into a surrounding fluid at temperature Tf is given by the equation:

Qconvection = h A (Ts - Tf)

where the heat transfer coefficient h has the units of W/m2K or Btu/s in

2F. The coefficient h is not a thermodynamic

property. It is a simplified correlation to the fluid state and the flow conditions and hence it is often called a flow property.

Convection is tied to the concept of a boundary layer which is a thin layer of transition between a surface that is assumed adjacent to stationary molecules and the flow of fluid in the surroundings. This is illustrated in the next figure for a flow over a flat plate.

Where u(x,y) is the x-direction velocity. The region up to the outer edge of the fluid layer, defined as 99% of the free stream velocity, is called the fluid boundary layer thickness d(x).

A similar sketch could be made of the temperature transition from the temperature of the surface to the temperature of the surroundings. A schematic of the temperature variation is shown in the next figure. Notice that the thermal boundary layer thickness is not necessarily the same as that of the fluid. Fluid properties that make up the Prandtl Number govern the relative magnitude of the two types of boundary layers. A Prandtl Number (Pr) of 1 would imply the same behavior for both boundary layers.

The actual mechanism of heat transfer through the boundary layer is taken to be conduction, in the y-direction, through the stationary fluid next to the wall being equal to the convection rate from the boundary layer to the fluid. This can be written as:

h A (Ts - Tf) = - k A (dT/dy)s

Thus the convection coefficient for a given situation can be evaluated by measuring the heat transfer rate and the temperature difference or by measuring the temperature gradient adjacent to the surface and the temperature difference.

Measuring a temperature gradient across a boundary layer requires high precision and is generally accomplished in a research laboratory. Many handbooks contain tabulated values of the convection heat transfer coefficients for different configurations.

The following table shows some typical values for the convective heat transfer coefficient:

Page 88: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

74

Motion Analysis

What Is Motion Analysis?

EMS couples to SolidWorks Motion which is available as in add-in from SolidWorks Premium. Using SolidWorks, you can accurately simulate and analyze the motion of an assembly while incorporating the effects of Motion Study elements (including forces, springs, dampers, and friction). A Motion Analysis study combines motion study elements with mates in motion calculations. Consequently motion constraints, material properties, mass, and component contact are included in the SolidWorks Motion kinematic solver calculations.

For a complete documentation about SolidWorks Motion, please refer to SolidWorks Help and SolidWorks Tutorials. As explained therein, in the motion manager, there are three types of motion study that can be defined:

Animation (available in core SolidWorks). You can use Animation to animate the motion

of assemblies:

Add motors to drive the motion of one or more parts of an assembly.

Prescribe the positions of assembly components at various times using set key points.

Animation uses interpolation to define the motion of assembly components between key points.

Basic Motion (available in core SolidWorks). You can use Basic Motion for approximating the effects of motors, springs, contact, and gravity on assemblies. Basic Motion takes mass into

account in calculating motion. Basic Motion computation is relatively fast, so you can use this for creating presentation-worthy animations using physics-based simulations.

Motion Analysis (available in SolidWorks Premium). You can use Motion Analysis for accurately simulating and analyzing the effects of motion elements (including forces, springs, dampers, and friction ) on an assembly. Motion Analysis uses computationally strong kinematic solvers, and

accounts for material properties as well as mass and inertia in the computations. You can also use Motion Analysis to plot simulation results for further analysis.

You may use any of the three types in SolidWorks Motion. However, you must use Motion Analysis if you want to couple the motion to EMS.

Page 89: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Analysis Background

75

Performing Motion Analysis

You may couple to SolidWorks Motion Magnetostatic, Electrostatic, AC Magnetic and Transient Magnetic analyses but not the Electric Conduction. The process of coupling an EMS study to SolidWorks Motion is straightforward and requires only a check mark when creating an EMS study. However, before creating an EMS study, a Band component that encloses the moving parts must be created in SolidWorks.

What's a Band?

A Band is a region that encapsules completely the moving components, e.g. the rotor, the shaft, and the permanent magnets in a permanent magnet brushless DC motor, and can not intersect any fixed component. Since EMS supports both rotational and translational motions. A rotary motion is cyclic, thus the Band is typically a cylinder that fills the air gap and encloses all rotating components. An example of a band for a brushless DC motor is shown below:

Cross section of a brushless permanent magnet DC motor. The yellow part is the Band. It encloses the moving parts from all sides. It also includes the air gap and touches the stator.

In case of a translational motion, the Band must occupy the entire range of the motion, i.e. from minimum to maximum. Thus, it tends to occupy a much larger volume compared to rotational motion. An example of band for a linear reluctance motor is shown below:

Page 90: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

76

It is the user's responsibility to make sure that the moving object remains inside the band. If the moving part, e.g. the plunger is the above example, goes beyond the band, the results will be wrong.

Starting a New Motion Study

You can create the first motion study for an assembly by clicking the Motion Study tab to the right of the Model tab toward the lower portion of the graphics area.

To start a new motion study for an assembly, open the assembly and do one of the following:

Right-click the Motion Study tab and click Create New Motion Study.

Click New Motion Study (Assembly toolbar).

The new motion study appears with the MotionManager tree defined by components of the FeatureManager design tree.

Page 91: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Analysis Background

77

Selecting a Motion Type

The available motion studies types are:

Animation

Basic Motion

Motion Analysis

You can select the type of motion study from the Type of Study list at the top of the MotionManager, located

below the FeatureManager design tree. However, to couple your motion study to EMS Motion, you can only choose Motion Analysis.

What to do at the EMS level?

Not much? you would define your EMS study the usual way with one exception. You must check the Motion Analysis check mark.

How about mass and moment of inertia?

You simply specify the material of the moving parts at the SolidWorks level, i.e. not at the EMS level. SolidWorks automatically computes the mass and moment of inertia properties and feed them into SolidWorks motion. The mass and inertia are important only for Force-based and not for the Motor-based motion.

Page 92: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

78

Motor-based versus Force-based motion studies

It important to distinguish between Motor and Force-based motion studies. SolidWorks Motion help includes a complete explanation of both type of studies. A brief discussion about these 2 type of motions is given below:

Motor-based motion

A Motor-based motion can be considered a "driven motion" as if it were applied by a motor without consideration of mass or inertia. In this case, we do not care about what causing and/or driving the motion. A typical example for this type of motion is a constant speed DC rotational motor with known speed. It is true that there magnetic forces and torques due to permanent magnets and/or windings. However, in Motor based situation, these forces are not directly related to the motion. At each time step, thus at each position, EMS solves the electromagnetic problem and computes the requested lumped quantities such as force, torque, inductance, impedance, back emf, etc.

Force-based motion

A Forcer-based motion can be considered a "driving motion" where mass or inertia are taken into consideration . In this case, we do care about what causing and/or driving the motion. A typical example for this type of motion is a generator. The applied external load, i.e. force or torque, is combined with the internal magnetic forces and torques due to permanent magnets and/or windings to drive the motion. Hence, the kinematic

Page 93: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Analysis Background

79

quantities such as the position, speed, and acceleration are not known a priori. At each time step, thus at each position, EMS interacts with SolidWorks Motion to obtain the external load, combines it with the magnetic force and torque, and then feeds back to SolidWorks Motion to solve the kinematics problem. Since, EMS computes the forces and torques to combine them with the external mechanical loads to drive the motion, it is important to specify in EMS the force set on the moving rigid body ensemble before solving, e.g.

Consequently, for Force-based motion EMS yields not only the usual electromagnetic quantities such as force, torque, impedance, back emf, but also the kinematics results such as speed and acceleration.

Page 94: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

80

Output of Motion Analysis

After running a study with the Motion Analysis option on, you can view the following:

The same electromagnetic results as non-motion study at each motion time step, hence position. In addition, the back emf due to the effect of the motion on the coils is readily available.

Kinematics results, i.e. position, speed, and acceleration.

Page 95: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

81

EMS Fundamentals

EMS Fundamentals

What is EMS?

EMS is a 3D-field simulator for electromagnetic and electromechanical applications. These applications include: bushing, insulators, circuit breakers, power generators, transformers, electric motors, capacitors, magnetic levitation devices, synchronous machines, DC machines, permanent magnet motors, actuators, solenoids, etc. EMS is an Add-in to SolidWorks® .

EMS is based on the powerful finite element method (FEM), which solves the physical equations directly without any simplifications or assumptions. It is designed to help you gain physical insight into the performance of your designs through the computation of important parameters such as: torques, forces, fields, currents, inductances, capacitances, flux linkages, current losses, electrical stresses, etc.

EMS shortens time to market by saving time and effort in searching for the optimum design.

This chapter discusses some basic concepts and terminology used throughout the EMS software. It provides an overview of the following topics:

Benefits of Analysis

Basic Concepts of Analysis

EMS Manager Tree

Design Studies

Analysis Steps

Material Properties

Restraints and Loads

Coils or Electromagnets

Meshing

Running Analysis

Viewing Results

Global and Local Coordinate Systems

Results Databases

Working With Assemblies

Using Units

Languages

Page 96: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

82

Benefits of Analysis

After building your design in SolidWorks, you need to make sure that it performs efficiently. In the absence of analysis tools, this task can only be answered by performing expensive and time-consuming product development cycles and prototypes. A product development cycle typically includes the following steps:

1. Building your model using the SolidWorks software. 2. Building a prototype of the design. 3. Testing the prototype in the field. 4. Evaluating the results of the field tests. 5. Modifying the design based on the field test results.

This process continues until a satisfactory solution is reached. Analysis can help you accomplish the following tasks:

Reduce cost by simulating the testing of your model on the computer instead of expensive field tests.

Reduce time to market by reducing the number of product development cycles.

Improve products by quickly testing many concepts and scenarios before making a final decision, giving you more time to think of new designs.

Page 97: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS Fundamentals

83

Basic Concepts of Analysis

EMS uses the Finite Element Method (FEM). FEM is a numerical technique for analyzing engineering designs. FEM is accepted as the standard analysis method due to its generality and suitability for computer implementation. FEM divides the model into many small pieces of simple shapes called elements effectively replacing a complex problem by many simple problems that need to be solved simultaneously.

CAD model of an assembly Model subdivided into small pieces (elements)

Elements share common points called nodes and common sides called edges. The process of dividing the model into small pieces is called meshing.

The response at any point in an element is interpolated from the response at the element nodes and edges. Each node/edge is fully described by a number of parameters depending on the analysis type and the element used. For example, the voltage of a node fully describes its response in electrostatic analysis. For magnetic analyses, both nodes and edges are used where the scalar quantities are placed on nodes and vectors quantities are placed on edges. The unknown coefficients associated with the nodes and/or edges are called degrees of freedom (DOFs). Analysis using FEM is called Finite Element Analysis (FEA).

EMS formulates the equations governing the behavior of each element taking into consideration its connectivity to other elements. These equations relate the response to known material properties, restraints, and excitations.

Next, the program organizes the equations into a large set of simultaneous algebraic equations and solves for the unknowns or the DOFs.

In electrostatic analysis, for example, the solver finds the voltage at each node and then the program calculates electric and displacement fields. For electrostatic

EMS offers the following type of studies:

Electrostatic (or Electric Field) studies. Electrostatic studies calculate electric field, electric displacement, voltage, capacitance matrix, force, torque, and electric energy.

Electrostatic analysis can help you identify points of high electric fields or the so called hot points that may generate sparks or lead to dielectric breakdowns. You may use it to determine forces and torques for electric motors and MEMS.

Electric Conduction (or Current Flow) studies. Electric Conduction studies calculate electric field, voltage, current density, resistance, and dissipated power.

Page 98: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

84

Electric Conduction analysis can help you determine current flow in wires and other conducting media. It can be instrumental in identifying points of high current density that may lead to a metal melting or fuse failure.

Magnetostatic studies. Magnetostatic studies calculate magnetic field, magnetic flux density, inductance

matrix, force, torque, and magnetic energy.

Magnetostatic analysis is probably the most commonly used by EMS users. Most electromechanical devices and instruments use permanent magnets and/or electric coils as their source of energy at DC frequency. This analysis can be instrumental in determining the performance of your electromechanical device. It may also be useful in computing the inductance matrix of your electronic device.

AC Magnetic (or Time Harmonic) studies. AC Magnetic studies calculate magnetic field, magnetic flux density, inductance matrix, force, torque, eddy currents, and power dissipated.

AC Magnetic analysis can help you determine eddy currents and skin effects which play an important role for both electronic and electromechanical devices and circuits. For example, for a circuit board you may determine the eddy current on a neighboring line which would indicate to you the level of cross talk. For a motor, you may determine the skin effects for your ferromagnetic components. You may also determine the induced voltage in a receiving coil due the currents in transmitting coils.

Transient Magnetic Studies. Just like the AC Magnetic, Transient Magnetic studies calculate magnetic

field, magnetic flux density, inductance matrix, force, torque, eddy currents, and power dissipated but for an arbitrary time dependence such as a pulse.

Again, Transient Magnetic analysis is similar to AC Magnetic analysis, except it has an arbitrary time dependence. Therefore, all features and capabilities of AC Magnetic are also available for Transient Magnetic at each time step. This type of analysis can be instrumental to determine the response of the system after the source is turned off.

Page 99: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS Fundamentals

85

EMS Manager Tree

The EMS Manager tree organizes analysis studies. Its functionality is similar to the FeatureManager tree. You can use the menu system or the EMS Manager tree to manage analysis studies. Because of its intuitive representation and context-sensitive right-mouse menus, the EMS Manager is preferred over the menu system.

EMS creates a folder in the EMS Manager tree for each study. Subfolders define the parameters of the study. For example, each electrical or magnetic study has a Load/Restraint subfolder. Each restraint and load condition is

represented by an icon in this subfolder.

Right-mouse menus provide context-sensitive options. Drag and drop (or copy and paste) help you to define

subsequent studies quickly.

Restraints and loads use PropertyManager instead of dialog boxes, allowing your graphics to be displayed instead of hidden by dialog boxes.

The EMS Manager tree provides a convenient view of most important information of analysis studies in a document

The EMS Manager tree provides the following folders and tools:

Each study is represented by a folder and subfolders in the tree. The subfolders depend on the study type. EMS assigns a unique icon to each study type for easy identification of the study type.

Study type Study icon

Electrostatic

Electric Conduction

Magnetostatic

AC Magnetic

Transient Magnetic

After a successful run of a study, EMS creates result folders in the tree. The subfolders depend on the type of the study.

Page 100: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

86

Design Studies

A device is usually subjected to different operational conditions and design criteria to achieve the desired specifications. It is, therefore, important to consider all possible scenarios of loads and boundary conditions and try different material properties in the analysis of a device.

A design study is defined by the following factors:

model dimensions

study type and related options to define analysis intent

material properties

loads, loads, and boundary conditions

To create a study, right-click the top icon in the EMS Manager tree and click Study. Click Add to define a study by

name, analysis type, and properties. The properties of the study set options related to a particular analysis type.

EMS meshes only with first order tetrahedral or the so called Tetra 4 mesh elements. Internally, first and second order scalar and vectors shape functions are derived.

Using Design Studies

You can use design studies to check existing products or design new ones.

Checking an existing design. When checking an existing product, the geometry is already determined.

The goal is to check the performance of the product under different working conditions and investigate the possibility of improving the performance.

Making a new design. When using design analysis to make a new design, you can try different

geometric configurations and materials to test the response of the model in various working conditions.

Page 101: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS Fundamentals

87

Analysis Steps

The steps needed to perform an analysis depend on the study type. You complete a study by performing the following steps:

Create a study defining its analysis type and options.

Define material properties for each body.

Specify restraints and loads. Specify restraints such as Flux is Normal for magnetic studies. For

electric studies, specify voltages or charges.

Mesh the model where EMS divides the model into many small pieces called elements.

Run the study.

View results.

NOTE: You can define material properties, loads, restraints, and create the mesh in any order. However, you must define all the necessary steps before running the study.

Page 102: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

88

Material Properties

Before running a study, you must define all the necessary material properties required by the corresponding analysis type. For example, the permeability is required for Magnetostatic, AC Magnetic, and Transient Magnetic studies, while the permittivity is needed for Electrostatic studies. You can define material properties at any time before running the analysis. All material properties are defined through the Material dialog box.

When you create a study, the program creates a Solids folder. The Solids folder will contain an icon for each body

in the component. Each body in the component must be assigned a material before running the analysis.

This section discusses the following topics:

Material Properties Used by EMS

Material Models

About Permanent Magnets

The B-H Curve of a material

Assigning a Material from a Material Library

Adding or Inserting a Material Library

Adding a Material to an Existing Library

Assigning a B-H Curve to a material

Assigning a Permanent Magnet

Materials in EMS are not related to materials defined in SolidWorks or CosmosWorks.

Page 103: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS Fundamentals

89

Restraints and Loads

Restraints, loads, or boundary conditions define the environment of the model. For Electrical analyses fixed voltages are commonly applied. For Magnetic studies Normal fluxes are often needed to enforce a symmetry condition or a far field truncation. Each restraint or load condition is represented by an icon in the EMS Manager tree. EMS provides study-sensitive options for defining restraints. For example, if a Magnetic study is considered, only Normal and/or Tangential fluxes are available for selection.

Loads and restraints are fully associative and automatically adjust to changes in geometry. The drag and drop (or copy and paste) functionality in the EMS Manager tree lets you copy studies, folders, and items.

Page 104: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

90

Specifying Directions

Specifying directions is often necessary during model definition and result viewing. In model definition, directions are used to define orthotropic material properties and permanent magnets. In result viewing, directions are required for viewing directional results, like electric fields, magnetic flux densities, applied current densities, and eddy current densities in certain directions.

In essence, one can think of different ways to specify directions such as references planes, planar faces, coordinate systems, and straight edges. Nevertheless, in this present release only the coordinate system is available to specify the directions for orthotropic material and permanent magnets. The result viewing is displayed in the global coordinate system.

Coordinate Systems

A coordinate system defines 3 directions, X, Y, and Z. The default coordinate system used by EMS, called the global coordinate system, is based on Plane1. The origin of the global coordinate system is located at the origin of the part or assembly. Plane1 is the top reference plane that appears in the FeatureManager design tree and can have a different name. The reference triad shows the global X-, Y-, and Z-directions. All other coordinate systems are referred to as local coordinate systems.

Page 105: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS Fundamentals

91

Coils or Electromagnets

A coil literally means a multiple-turn winding of a conductor such as copper wire wound around a bobbin. When the conducting windings carry current, a magnetic field is produced. Much stronger magnetic fields can be produced if a core of ferromagnetic material such as iron or steel is placed inside the coil. The field produced by the coil causes the iron to magnetize and generate a field of its own. This field can be hundreds or thousands of times stronger than that of the coil itself. A coil is also called electromagnet.

The main advantage of a electromagnet over a permanent magnet is that the magnetic field can be rapidly manipulated over a wide range by controlling the electric current. The poles of an electromagnet can even be reversed by reversing the flow of electricity.

The main disadvantage of an electromagnet compared to a permanent is the possible accumulation of residual magnetization in the ferromagnetic core. Whenever, a coil with a ferromagnetic core is turned on and off again, the core may retain some residual magnetization due to hysteresis. This magnetic field can persist indefinitely. As more electricity is passed through the electromagnet, more domains align, causing the magnetic field strength to increase.

In applications where a variable magnetic field is not required, permanent magnets are generally superior. Since a electromagnet requires a constant flow of electricity, it consumes electrical power. Additionally, permanent magnets can be manufactured to produce stronger fields than any electromagnet of similar size.

Both electromagnets and permanent magnets are of prime importance in EMS. They are the driving force for any magnetic device. In the finite element sense, they represent the excitations. However, they are treated differently in EMS.

When you create a Magnetic study, the program creates a Coils folder in the EMS Manager tree. EMS adds an item in the Coils folder for each coil you define on one or more entities. However, permanent magnets are specified with the materials.

Page 106: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

92

Air Modeling

Unlike structural analysis, electromagnetic analysis requires the modeling of the air regions between the different components and the air surrounding the device. Why? Because electromagnetic fields generated by the device span and extend over such air regions. How far do they extend? It depends on the frequency, the materials of the device, and the strength of the source.

Air truncation

The air region surrounding the device is in essence infinite. Shall the finite element model include an infinite region? No. The infinite region must be truncated in order to limit the number of unknowns to a manageable size that can fit in the computer memory. What is the shape such region? It does not matter as long as it is far enough from the device. But what is far enough?

How far is the air region?

There is no exact rule! But if you take an imaginary box that covers your device and you place your air region away from you device by about 1/2 to 1 of the longest side of your box shall be far enough. How do I check if it is indeed so? Run your study and examine the fields on the outer boundary of the air. If the fields have decayed to very small value compared to the maximum, then the outer boundary is far enough. Otherwise, push the outer boundary even further out. But won't that lead to a very large problem? Not if you follow the guidelines below.

Air meshing

You have to distinguish between the outer air that is surrounding the device and the inside air between the various parts of the device such air gaps. The inside air shall be meshed moderately fine to capture the fields variations. However, the outer air need not to be fine because the fields decay away from the device.

An exception

Air has to be modeled and meshed for all the analyses, except for the Electric Conduction. Why? Because for

this type of analysis the electrically conducting media making up the device is modeled. Since air has an almost zero conductivity, it needs not to be meshed. Nonetheless, if the air region has a nonzero electric conductivity for any reason, then such region must also be modeled even in the case of the Electric Conduction analysis.

Page 107: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS Fundamentals

93

Meshing

Finite Element Analysis (FEA) provides a reliable numerical technique for analyzing engineering designs. The process starts with the creation of a geometric model. Then, the program subdivides the model into small pieces of simple shapes called elements connected at common points called nodes. The process of subdividing the model into small pieces is called meshing. Finite element analysis programs look at the model as a network of interconnected elements.

The accuracy of the solution depends on the quality of the mesh. In general, the finer the mesh the better the accuracy. The generated mesh depends on the following factors:

Created geometry

Mesh options.

Mesh control.

Global element size and mesh tolerance. EMS suggests a global element size and tolerance. The global element size refers to the average length of an element edge. The number of elements increases rapidly by using a smaller global element size.

Page 108: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

94

Running Studies

After assigning materials, defining loads and restraints, and meshing the model, you can run the study to calculate the results. If you run a study before meshing it, EMS meshes the model and runs the study.

To run a study, right-click its icon in the EMS Manager tree and select Run or click Run in the EMS toolbar.

Solvers

Direct methods solve the equations using exact numerical techniques. Iterative methods solve the equations using approximate techniques where in each iteration, a solution is assumed and the associated errors are evaluated. The iterations continue until the errors become acceptable.

Depending on the analysis type, the following points must be taken into consideration.

For Electrostatic, Electric Conduction, and Magnetostatic studies EMS offers both direct and iterative matrix solvers. The direct is the recommended and default solver. However, if the program complains about the lack of memory, please switch to the iterative solver.

For AC and Transient Magnetic studies, there is no matrix solver option. But internally it is the iterative solver that is implemented.

Refer to the Design Studies section for more information.

Page 109: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS Fundamentals

95

Viewing Results

After running the analysis, EMS generates standard plots for each type of analysis automatically. The standard plots for an analysis type are the most commonly used results. For example, after running a Magnetostatic study, EMS creates result folders containing default plots for magnetic flux density, magnetic field, and applied current density if applicable. You can view a plot by double-clicking its icon in the EMS Manager tree.

You can also define other plots by right-clicking a result folder and selecting Define.

EMS result viewing tools include fringe plots, section plots, iso plots, probing, and vector plots. For sections plots, you can choose various planes. A clipping utility is provided for convenient viewing of section and iso plots.

For more information, refer to the Viewing Results section.

Generating Reports

You can generate a structured Internet-ready report that includes all available plots automatically. The report wizard guides you to customize the report and include result plots. To start the Report wizard, right-click the Report folder and select Define.

Saving Result Plots

You can save result plots in various formats. You can include result plots automatically in the study report. To save a plot in any of these formats, right-click the plot icon and select Save As.

Page 110: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

96

Coordinate Systems

The Global Coordinate System

Directional input in EMS refers by default to the global coordinate system (X, Y, and Z), which is based on Plane1 with its origin located at the Origin of the part or assembly. Plane1 is the first plane that appears in the FeatureManager tree and can have a different name. The reference triad shows the global X-, Y-, and Z-directions.

The figure below illustrates the relationship between the global coordinate system and Plane1, Plane2, and Plane3.

Where X is Direction 1 of Plane 1, Y is Direction 2 of Plane 1, and, Z is the Normal to Plane 1.

Local Coordinate Systems

Local coordinate systems are coordinate systems other than the global coordinate system. Use local coordinate system to specify the magnetization direction of a permanent magnet and principal axes for orthotropic materials.

Page 111: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS Fundamentals

97

Result Databases

EMS saves the results of each study a database file with extension EMS The database name for a study is constructed automatically by joining the study name to the part or assembly name separated by “-”. For example if the document name is Magnet-assembly and the study name is Study1, then the file name for the study will be Magnetassembly-Study1.EMS.

To transfer the results of a study from computer A to computer B, copy the EMS file of the study and the SolidWorks document file. You should copy the EMS file to the proper folder as specified in the Results Options of computer B. To change this folder, right-click the top icon in the EMS Manager tree, select Options, and click the Results tab.

Page 112: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

98

Working with Assemblies

When working with assemblies, note the following:

Click Tools, Interference Detection to check interference. Make sure that the Treat coincidence as interference option is unchecked. All parts should be free from interference with each other for proper

modeling.

Click Tools, Check to check for invalid faces and invalid edges. Checking for short edges can help in

diagnosing meshing problems.

You can exclude a component from analysis by suppressing it and then remeshing the model. If a mesh exists and you do not remesh, the components will be considered in the analysis.

Hiding a component does not exclude it from analysis. In other words, the program meshes hidden components. You can hide components and create exploded views for improved selection and viewing during study definition.

Page 113: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS Fundamentals

99

About Units

EMS uses the MKS system of units. Nevertheless, it offers you the choice between MKS and CGS when it comes to material properties of a permanent magnet and B-H curve. Most material data for permanent magnets and

ferromagnetic materials are specified in CGS units. As for output results, you have the option to view them in various units.

The Meshing PropertyManager displays the suggested average element size and the tolerance in the default

unit of length in SolidWorks.

The MKS units of principal electromagnetic quantities are given in the table below.

Page 114: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

100

Languages

EMS is available in the following languages:

English

Page 115: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

101

EMS Interface

EMS Interface Components

This section discusses the following interface components of EMS:

EMS Manager Tree

Toolbars

Page 116: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

102

EMS Manager Tree

EMS Manager Tree

The EMS Manager tree organizes analysis studies. Its functionality is similar to the FeatureManager tree. You can use the menu system or the EMS Manager tree to manage analysis studies. Because of its intuitive representation and context-sensitive right-mouse menus, the EMS Manager is preferred over the menu system.

EMS creates a folder in the EMS Manager tree for each study. Subfolders define the parameters of the study. For example, each electrical or magnetic study has a Load/Restraint subfolder. Each restraint and load condition is represented by an icon in this subfolder.

Right-mouse menus provide context-sensitive options. Drag and drop (or copy and paste) help you to define subsequent studies quickly.

Restraints and loads use PropertyManager instead of dialog boxes, allowing your graphics to be displayed instead of hidden by dialog boxes.

The EMS Manager tree provides a convenient view of most important information of analysis studies in a document

The EMS Manager tree provides the following folders and tools:

Each study is represented by a folder and subfolders in the tree. The subfolders depend on the study type. EMS assigns a unique icon to each study type for easy identification of the study type.

Study type Study icon

Electrostatic

Electric Conduction

Magnetostatic

AC Magnetic

Transient Magnetic

After a successful run of a study, EMS creates result folders in the tree. The subfolders depend on the type of the study.

Page 117: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS Interface

103

EMS Manager Tree Conventions

The EMS Manager tree uses the following conventions:

A plus sign symbol to the left of an item’s icon indicates that it contains associated sub-items, such as load or restraint items, mesh controls. Click to expand the item and display its contents.

EMS assigns the following icons to each study type for easy identification of the study type:

Study type Study icon

Electrostatic

Electric Conduction

Magnetostatic

AC Magnetic

Transient Magnetic

A red check mark on an item indicates that the item has been partially or fully defined. For example, when a

material is assigned to a part, the part's icon changes from to .

When meshing of an assembly is completed, the mesh icon changes from to .

EMS assigns this icon to user-defined mesh controls.

When you right-click an item, a right-mouse menu opens. Use this menu to quickly access related operations.

Page 118: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

104

Define Study Name

The Define Study Name dialog box allows you to create a new study by drag and drop or by copy and paste. You

can also associate the study with any of the existing SolidWorks configurations.

Study Name. Type a name for the study.

SolidWorks configuration to use. Select the desired SolidWorks configuration from the list.

To create a study by drag and drop:

1. In the EMS Manager tree, drag a study icon and drop it onto the part or assembly icon at the top of the tree.

The Define Study Name dialog box opens.

2. Type a name for the new study in the Study Name box.

3. Select a SolidWorks configuration.

4. Click OK

To create a study using copy and paste:

1. In the EMS Manager tree, right-click a study icon the select Copy. 2. At the top of the tree, right-click the part or assembly icon and select Paste.

The Define Study Name dialog box opens.

3. Type a name for the new study in the Study Name box.

4. Select a SolidWorks configuration.

5. Click OK .

NOTES:

When using drag and drop (or copy and paste) to create a study, the new study will have the same analysis and mesh types as the original study.

If the configuration you selected is not the active SolidWorks configuration, the new study is grayed out. A

feature that is not well-defined with the specified configuration appears with x (in red) on top of its icon in the tree. To access a grayed-out study, activate the SolidWorks configuration associated with it.

Page 119: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS Interface

105

Drag and Drop Functionality

Once you have defined a study, you can use drag and drop to help you define subsequent studies quickly and efficiently. Drag and drop are similar to copy and paste.

Drag and Drop Rules

You can drag and drop (or copy and paste) studies, materials, loads/restraints, mesh control, and results. You can drag and drop folders (including all items inside), a single item, or a group of items.

To avoid invalid input, EMS will let you drop items and folders to valid destinations only. While dragging an item, a group of items or folder, only the valid destinations in the EMS Manager tree will highlight. For example you can drag and drop material folders and items from any study to any other study, but you cannot drag and drop Load/restraint folders or items from an electrostatic study to a magnetostatic study or vice versa.

NOTES:

You can only drag and drop result folders and items from one study to another study of the same type. For example, when you drag a Magnetic Flux Density Plot icon from a magnetostatic study and move it along the EMS Manager tree, only the Magnetic Flux Density folders of a magnetostatic studies will highlight. This table summarizes these rules.

Item to Drag Drop to Notes

Solid Folder Solid Folder Valid for all studies (copies materials)

Items in the Solids Folder Solids folder Valid for all studies (copies materials)

Load/Restraint Folder Study Valid for relevant studies only (compatible analysis)

Items in the Loads/Restraint Folder

Loads/Restraint folder

Valid for relevant studies only (electric study to electric study, or magnetic study to magnetic study)

Results Folder Study Valid for the same type of study only

Items in the Results Folder Corresponding folder Same result type only (field item to field folder, potential item to potential folder, etc.)

Mesh folder Study folder Valid for all studies (copies mesh)

Mesh control items Mesh icon

Page 120: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

106

Toolbars

EMS Toolbars

EMS toolbars provide you with shortcuts to frequently used operations. This section gives brief description of all EMS toolbar. You can easily customize the toolbar by hiding it or moving it around as desired.

To move the toolbar, click anywhere on its boundary and drag it to the desired location.

To hide/show a toolbar, click View, Toolbars and choose the toolbar that you want to hide/show.

If you drag a toolbar away from the edges, it becomes a floating palette.

If you drag a toolbar close to a horizontal edge, it will extend horizontally. Similarly, if you drag it to a vertical edge, it will extend vertically.

To display a tool tip, place the mouse pointer on it. To execute a tool, point to it and click the left mouse button.

EMS has the following toolbar:

Button Tool Tip Purpose

Study Defines, modifies, or deletes studies.

Mesh Creates solid mesh for the active study.

Run Starts the solver for the active study.

Show/Hide Mesh Toggles the visibility of the mesh.

Apply Mesh Control Defines a mesh control for selected entities.

Flux is Normal Imposes a normal flux boundary condition on the selected faces for the active magnetic study (magnetostatic, AC magnetic, and transient magnetic).

Flux is Tangential Imposes a tangential flux boundary condition on the selected faces for the active magnetic study (magnetostatic, AC magnetic, and transient magnetic).

Electric Charge Defines an electric charge density on the selected entities for the active electrostatic study only.

Floating Conductor Defines a floating conductor on the selected entities for the active electrostatic study only.

Contact Resistance Defines a contact resistance on the selected face for the active electric conduction study only.

Fixed Voltage Defines a fixed voltage on the selected entities for the active electrical study (electrostatic and electric conduction).

Temperature Defines a temperature on the selected entities for the active study when thermal solution option is on (electrostatic, electric conduction, magnetostatic and AC magnetic).

Convection Defines a convection on the selected entities for the active study when thermal solution option is on (electrostatic, electric conduction, magnetostatic and AC magnetic).

Page 121: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS Interface

107

Heat Flux Defines a heat heat on the selected entities for the active study when thermal solution option is on (electrostatic, electric conduction, magnetostatic and AC magnetic).

Volume Heat Defines a volume heat on the selected entities for the active study when thermal solution option is on (electrostatic, electric conduction, magnetostatic and AC magnetic).

Solid Coil Defines a solid coil for the active magnetic study (magnetostatic, AC magnetic, and transient magnetic).

Wound Coil Defines a wound coil for the active magnetic study (magnetostatic, AC magnetic, and transient magnetic).

Function curve Defines a function curve.

Virtual work force Calculates the virtual work force & torque on the selected entities for the active study. Valid for all studies except for electric conduction.

Lorentz force

Calculates the Lorentz force & torque on the selected entities for the active study. Valid for the active magnetic study (magnetostatic, AC magnetic, and transient magnetic).

Resistance Calculates resistance on the selected entities for the active electric conduction study only .

Report Creates an html report for the active study.

Results Table View the results table for the active study.

Page 122: EMS_UserGuide.pdf
Page 123: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

109

Design Studies

Design Studies

The concept of design studies lies at the heart of the operation of EMS. In this section, you learn about the following topics:

The Concept of Design Studies

Study Types

Mesh Types

Creating a Study

Electrostatic Study Properties

Electric Conduction Study Properties

Magnetostatic Study Properties

AC Magnetic Study Properties

Transient Magnetic Study Properties

EMS Matrix Solvers

Multiple Studies

Page 124: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

110

Concept of Design Studies

A model is usually subjected to different design criteria and performance conditions. It is therefore important to consider all possible scenarios of loads and boundary conditions and try different material properties in the analysis of a model.

A design study is defined by the following factors:

model dimensions

study type and related options to define the analysis intent

material properties

loads and boundary conditions

mesh

Analysis Types

Defining an Analysis Study

Page 125: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Design Studies

111

Study Types

EMS offers the following types of studies:

Electrostatic (or Electric Field) studies. Electrostatic studies calculate electric field, electric displacement, voltage, capacitance matrix, force, torque, and electric energy.

Electrostatic analysis can help you identify points of high electric fields or the so called hot points that may generate sparks or lead to dielectric breakdowns. You may use it to determine forces and torques for electric motors and MEMS.

Electric Conduction (or Current Flow) studies. Electric Conduction studies calculate electric field, voltage, current density, resistance, and dissipated power.

Electric Conduction analysis can help you determine current flow in wires and other conducting media. It can be instrumental in identifying points of high current density that may lead to a metal melting or fuse failure.

Magnetostatic studies. Magnetostatic studies calculate magnetic field, magnetic flux density, inductance matrix, force, torque, and magnetic energy.

Magnetostatic analysis is probably the most commonly used by EMS users. Most electromechanical devices and instruments use permanent magnets and/or electric coils as their source of energy at DC frequency. This analysis can be instrumental in determining the performance of your electromechanical device. It may also be useful in computing the inductance matrix of your electronic device.

AC Magnetic (or Time Harmonic) studies. AC Magnetic studies calculate magnetic field, magnetic flux density, inductance matrix, force, torque, eddy currents, and power dissipated.

AC Magnetic analysis can help you determine eddy currents and skin effects which play an important role for both electronic and electromechanical devices and circuits. For example, for a circuit board you may determine the eddy current on a neighboring line which would indicate to you the level of cross talk. For a motor, you may determine the skin effects for your ferromagnetic components. You may also determine the induced voltage in a receiving coil due the currents in transmitting coils.

Transient Magnetic Studies. Just like the AC Magnetic, Transient Magnetic studies calculate

magnetic field, magnetic flux density, inductance matrix, force, torque, eddy currents, and power dissipated but for an arbitrary time dependence such as a pulse.

Again, Transient Magnetic analysis is similar to AC Magnetic analysis, except it has an arbitrary time dependence. Therefore, all features and capabilities of AC Magnetic are also available for Transient Magnetic at each time step. This type of analysis can be instrumental to determine the response of the system after the source is turned off.

Page 126: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

112

Element Types

EMS uses Vector Finite Element which necessitate first-order tetrahedral 3D solid elements. Therefore, the mesher generates only these elements.

Page 127: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Design Studies

113

Study

The Study PropertyManager allows you to create studies.

To create a study:

1. Right-click the assembly or part icon at the top of the EMS Manager tree and select Study, or click EMS, Study.

The Study PropertyManager appears.

2. Under Study name, type the name of the study. 3. Under Analysis type, select one of the following:

Electrostatic

Electric Conduction

Magnetostatic

AC Magnetic

Transient Magnetic

4. Click OK

NOTE: You can click Apply to create the study without closing the PropertyManager .

To delete a study, right-click its icon and select Delete.

To view details about a study, right-click its icon and select Details.

Note: Properties of the study play an important role in defining it. To view or modify the properties of a study, right-click its icon in the EMS Manager tree and select Properties.

You can create a study using drag and drop or copy and paste.

Page 128: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

114

EMS Analysis Options

Page 129: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Design Studies

115

Electrostatic Analysis Options

Electrostatic Options

Use the Electrostatic dialog box to set the desired options for the active Electrostatic study.

Solver the following two solver options are available:

o Direct. Check this option to use the Direct sparse solver. This is default and

recommended solver type. o Iterative Check this option to use the Iterative solver. Use if the memory available is

not sufficient for Direct solver.

Solver precision. Select the desired level of precision. Three level are available ( Normal Precision,

High Precision or Very High Precision).

Compute Capacitance. Check this box if you want to compute capacitance.

Motion Analysis. Check this box if you want to include a Motion analysis solution to the current

electrostatic analysis.

To change the default Results folder location, click and select a different directory.

What is Electrostatic Analysis....

Page 130: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

116

Electric Conduction Analysis Options

Electric Conduction Options

Use the Electric Conduction dialog box to set the desired options for the active Electric conduction study.

Solver currently, the only option available for Electric Conduction studies is the matrix solver (Direct )

type .

For future release two solver options will be available:

o Direct. Check this option to use the Direct sparse solver. This is default and

recommended solver type. o Iterative Check this option to use the Iterative solver. Use if the memory available is

not sufficient for Direct solver.

Steady State Thermal. Check this box if you want to include a Thermal analysis solution to the

current Electric Conduction study.

Motion Analysis. Check this box if you want to include a Motion analysis solution to the current

Electric Conduction analysis.

To change the default Results folder location, click and select a different directory.

What is Electric Conduction Analysis....

Page 131: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Design Studies

117

Magnetostatic Analysis Options

Magnetostatic Options

Use the Magnetostatic dialog box to set the desired options for the active Magnetostatic study.

Solver Two choices are available: o Direct. Check this option to use the Direct sparse solver. This is default and recommended

solver type. o Iterative Check this option to use the Iterative solver. Use if the memory available is not

sufficient for Direct solver.

The number of increments for nonlinear problems. If the coil current or the permanent magnet load is

high, the nonlinear solution may not converge. In such case, the load must be subdivided into smaller increments. For each increment, the Modified Newton-Raphson technique is used. If at any given increment, the total number of iterations is reached without convergence, the program stops and asks you to increase the number of increments.

Compute circuit parameters. Check this box if you want the inductance matrix and flux linkage to be

computed. It takes extra time to compute these quantities. Therefore, if the user does not need them, they should not be computed.

Steady State Thermal. Check this box if you want to include a Thermal analysis solution to the

current magnetostatic analysis.

Motion Analysis. Check this box if you want to include a Motion analysis solution to the current

magnetostatic analysis.

To change the default Results folder location, click and select a different directory.

What is Magnetostatic Analysis...

Page 132: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

118

AC Magnetic Analysis Options

AC Magnetic Options

Use the AC Magnetic dialog box to set the desired options for the active AC Magnetic study.

Frequency. Enter the frequency in Hz.

Compute circuit parameters. Check this box if you want the inductance matrix, the flux linkage, and

the induced voltage to be computed. It takes extra time to compute these quantities. Therefore, if the user does not need them, they should not be computed.

Split Core Loss. Check this box if you want to compute the Eddy, Hysteresis and Excess losses for the

current AC Magnetic study.

Steady State Thermal. Check this box if you want to include a Thermal analysis solution to the

current AC Magnetic study.

Motion Analysis. Check this box if you want to include a Motion analysis solution to the current AC Magnetic analysis.

To change the default Results folder location, click and select a different directory.

What is AC Magnetic Analysis...

Page 133: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Design Studies

119

Transient Magnetic Analysis Options

Transient Magnetic Options

Use the Transient Magnetic dialog box to set the desired options for the active Magnetostatic study.

Compute circuit parameters. Check this box if you want the inductance matrix and flux linkage to be

computed. It takes extra time to compute these quantities. Therefore, if the user does not need them, they should not be computed.

Time Duration: You must specify the following time quantities; o Start Time: Enter here the starting time in seconds. For example: 1e-05. o End Time: Enter the ending time in seconds. For example: 1e-03. o Time Increment: Enter the time step in seconds. The solver will start from the start time and

increment the time by the step entered here.

Maximum number of bisections: During the simulation, if the solver does not converge, the program will

automatically bisect each time step recursively until it converges or reaches the maximum number of bisections.

Steady State Thermal. Check this box if you want to include a Thermal analysis solution to the

current Transient analysis.

Motion Analysis. Check this box if you want to include a Motion analysis solution to the current analysis.

To change the default Results folder location, click and select a different directory.

What is Transient Magnetic Analysis...

Page 134: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

120

EMS Matrix Solvers

In finite element analysis, a problem is represented by a set of algebraic equations that must be solved simultaneously. There are two classes of matrix solution methods: direct and iterative.

Direct methods solve the equations using exact numerical techniques. Iterative methods solve the equations using approximate techniques where in each iteration, a solution is assumed and the associated errors are evaluated. The iterations continue until the errors become acceptable.

Depending on the analysis type, the following points must be taken into consideration.

For Electrostatic, Electric Conduction, and Magnetostatic studies EMS offers both direct and iterative matrix solvers. The direct is the recommended and default solver. However, if the program complains about the lack of memory, please switch to the iterative solver.

For AC and Transient Magnetic studies, there is no matrix solver option. But internally it is the iterative solver that is implemented.

Page 135: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Design Studies

121

Multiple Studies

You can create multiple studies as desired. Each study is presented in the EMS Manager tree. When you run a study, the program uses the active mesh if it is current, otherwise it meshes the model before running the study.

Page 136: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

122

Activating a SolidWorks Configuration

To activate a SolidWorks configuration associated with a study:

In the EMS Manager tree, right-click the study icon and select Activate SW configuration.

The study and the associated configuration become active.

Page 137: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Design Studies

123

Modifying the Properties of a Study

To modify the properties of a study:

1. In the EMS Manager, right-click the study's icon and select Properties.

The corresponding study dialog box appears.

2. Make your changes and click OK.

3. Click any of the following links to learn more about the properties available for each study (analysis) type.

Electrostatic Options

Electric Conduction Options

Magnetostatic Options

AC Magnetic Options

Transient Magnetic Options

4. You can also change the location of the results folder by clicking on under Results Folder box.

Page 138: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

124

Deleting a Study

To delete a study using the EMS Manager tree:

1. In the EMS Manager tree, right-click the study icon and select Delete.

A message window appears.

2. Click OK .

Page 139: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Design Studies

125

Running a Study

Verifying the Input

It is important to verify your input before running a study:

Verify that you have assigned the proper material for each component.

Verify that you have specified the proper study properties.

Verify that you have specified the proper loads and restraints.

Verify the mesh and make sure it corresponds to the desired mesh options.

Running a Study

When you run a study, EMS calculates the results based on the specified input for materials, restraints, loads, and mesh.

You can choose to run a study automatically after meshing it by checking the Run analysis after meshing option in the Mesh PropertyManager.

Page 140: EMS_UserGuide.pdf
Page 141: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

127

Material Information

Material Properties

Before running a study, you must define all the necessary material properties required by the corresponding analysis type. For example, the permeability is required for Magnetostatic, AC Magnetic, and Transient Magnetic studies, while the permittivity is needed for Electrostatic studies. You can define material properties at any time before running the analysis. All material properties are defined through the Material dialog box.

When you create a study, the program creates a Solids folder. The Solids folder will contain an icon for each body in the component. Each body in the component must be assigned a material before running the analysis.

This section discusses the following topics:

Material Properties Used by EMS

Material Models

About Permanent Magnets

The B-H Curve of a material

Assigning a Material from a Material Library

Adding or Inserting a Material Library

Adding a Material to an Existing Library

Assigning a B-H Curve to a material

Assigning a Permanent Magnet

Materials in EMS are not related to materials defined in SolidWorks or CosmosWorks.

Page 142: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

128

Material Properties Used in EMS

Permittivity. Permittivity, or dielectric constant, can be looked at as the quality of a material that allows it

to store electrical charge. A given amount of material with high permittivity can store more charge than a material with lower permittivity. A high permittivity tends to reduce any electric field present. Therefore the capacitance of a capacitor can be increased by increasing the permittivity of the dielectric material inside it. In electromagnetism one can define an electric displacement field D, which represents how an applied electric field E will influence the organization of electrical charges in the medium, including charge

migration and electric dipole reorientation. Its relation to permittivity is given by D = E, where ε is the

permittivity which is a scalar if the medium is isotropic or a 3 by 3 matrix otherwise. In MKS units, permittivity is measured in farads per meter (F/m).

Free Space Permittivity (o). Is the permittivity of vacuum or the scale factor that relates the values of

D and E in a vacuum. o= 8.8541878176×10-12

F/m.

Relative Permittivity. It is the ratio of the permittivity of the medium to the free space permittivity r =

/o. It is dimensionless.

Since the permittivity it is a very small number, the relative permittivity is the most commonly used. The relative permittivity is used in the Electrostatic analysis.

Permeability. Permeability is the degree of magnetisation of a material that responds linearly to an

applied magnetic field. Although permeability is related in physical terms most closely to permittivity, it is probably easier to think of permeability as representing "conductivity for magnetic flux"; just as those materials with high electrical conductivity let electric current through easily so materials with high permeabilities allow magnetic flux through more easily than others. Materials with high permeabilities

include iron and the other ferromagnetic materials. The permeability is usually denoted by and it relates

the magnetic flux density B to the magnetic field intensity H; BH In MKS units, permeability is

measured in henrys per meter (H/m). It is a scalar if the medium is isotropic or a 3 by 3 matrix otherwise. Unlike permittivity , permeability is often a highly non-linear quantity, especially for steel and iron.

Free Space Permeability(o). Is the permeability of vacuum or the scale factor that relates the values of

B and H in a vacuum. o= 4×10-7

H/m.

Relative Permeability. It is the ratio of the permeability of the medium to the free space permeability r =

/o. It is dimensionless.

Since the permeability it is a very small number, the relative permeability is the most commonly used. The relative permeability is used in the Magnetostatic, AC Magnetic, and Transient Magnetic analyses.

Electric Conductivity. Electric conductivity, or simply conductivity, is a measure of how well a material

accommodates the transport of electric charge. Its MKS derived unit is the siemens per meter (named after Werner von Siemens). Electrical conduction is an electrical phenomenon where a material (solid or otherwise) contains movable particles with electric charge, which can carry electricity. When a difference of electrical potential is placed across a conductor, its movable charges flow, and an electric current appears. Conductivity is defined as the ratio of the current density to the electric field strength. It is the reciprocal of electrical resistivity. It is usually represented by the letter σ. Scientists often divide materials into three classes based upon their respective conductivities:

o A conductor such as a metal has high conductivity. o An insulator like glass or a vacuum has low conductivity. o The conductivity of a semiconductor is generally intermediate, but varies widely under different

conditions, such as exposure of the material to electric fields or certain frequencies of light.

Electrical conductivity is used in Electric Conduction, AC Magnetic, and Transient Magnetic analyses.

Coercivity. Coercivity or the coercive force is a property of a permanent magnet. Commonly denoted by

the letter Hc, it is the intensity of the magnetic field needed to reduce the magnetization of a ferromagnetic material to zero after it has reached saturation. On a Hysteresis loop, it is the point where the loop intersects the H axis .The coercivity is measured in Amperes per meter (A/m) in MKS units and in Oersted in Gaussian units.

Page 143: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Material Information

129

Coercivity is used in Magnetostatic and Transient Magnetic analyses.

Residual Induction. Residual induction or remanence is also a property of a permanent magnet.

Commonly denoted by the letter Br, it is the amount of magnetic flux density remaining in a ferromagnetic material after an external magnetic field is removed after saturation in a closed circuit. On a Hysteresis loop, it is the point where the loop intersects the B axis. The Br represents the maximum magnetic flux density output of this material without an external magnetic field. The Residual induction is measured in Tesla in MKS units and in Gauss in Gaussian units.

Residual Induction is used in Magnetostatic and Transient Magnetic analyses.

Permanent Polarization. Certain materials maintain an electric flux due to its microscopic dipoles

permanent orientation even in the absence of an external electric field. A body such as this with a permanent polarization P is called an electret, by analogy with "magnet." In MKS units, it is measured in

Coulombs/m2.

Thermal Conductivity. The Thermal Conductivity indicates the effectiveness of a material in transferring

heat energy by conduction. It is defined as the rate of heat transfer through a unit thickness of the material per unit temperature difference. The units of thermal conductivity is W/m*K ( Watt / meter * Kelvin )

Page 144: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

130

Material Models

Linear Materials

The induced response is directly proportional to the applied loads. For example, if you double the applied voltage, the potential and electric field would double. Similarly, if you double the coil current, the magnetic flux density and magnetic field would double.

In EMS, the conductivity and permittivity are always linear. Consequently, the Electrostatic and Electric Conduction analyses are always linear.

Nonlinear Materials

The induced response depends on the past history of the material. For example, most ferromagnetic materials have a hysteresis loop or B-H curve where the response depends whether the device is operated above the knee of the curve.

In EMS, only the permeability may be nonlinear. Furthermore, such nonlinearity is permitted only for the Magnetostatic and Transient Magnetic analyses. The AC Magnetic analysis does not support nonlinear permeability.

Isotropic Materials

A material is isotropic if its electrical and magnetic properties are the same in all directions. Isotropic materials can have a homogeneous or non-homogeneous microscopic structures.

Orthotropic Materials

A material is orthotropic if its electrical or magnetic properties are unique and independent in three mutually perpendicular directions.

The table below gives a summary for the different analyses:

ANALYSIS TYPE LINEAR

ISOTROPIC LINEAR

ORTHOTROPIC NONLINEAR

ISOTROPIC NONLINEAR

ORTHOTROPIC

Electrostatic YES YES NO NO

Electric Conduction

YES YES NO NO

Magnetostatic YES YES YES NO

AC Magnetic YES YES NO NO

Transient Magnetic

YES YES YES NO

Defining Orthotropic Properties For Solids

The orthotropic material directions throughout a component are defined based on the local coordinate system selected. If a part is manufactured such that this is not true, then you should model it as different parts in order to define orthotropic directions properly. For example, consider the part shown in the figure:

Page 145: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Material Information

131

You need to model this component as two components; the cylinder and the planar part. You can then define a coordinate system for the planar part where the main orthotropic axes are along (x,yz). As for the cylindrical part,

define a second coordinate system where the main orthotropic axes are along ( z).

Page 146: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

132

About Permanent Magnets

A permanent magnet is a material that when inserted into a strong magnetic field will begin to exhibit a magnetic field of its own. Furthermore, it also continue to exhibit a magnetic field once removed from the original field due to its atomic micro-structure. That's what makes permanent magnets interesting! Indeed, the exhibited field would allow the magnet to exert force, i.e. ability to attract or repel, on other magnetic materials. Such exhibited field would then be continuous without weakening provided the material is not subjected to a change in environment such as temperature, demagnetizing field, etc.. The ability to continue exhibiting a field while withstanding different environments helps to define the capabilities and types of applications in which a magnet can be successfully used.

Permanent magnets are usually called hard magnetic materials. This type of material is characterized by a B-H Curve that starts in the second quadrant if it exhibits a nonlinearity behavior. They are other magnets but they are not permanent magnets which are called soft magnetic materials whose B-H Curve is limited to the first quadrant.

They are similar to permanent magnets in that they exhibit a magnetic field of their own in the presence of an external magnetic field. However, they do not continue to exhibit a magnetic field once the applied field is reduced to zero. These materials are useful for carrying, concentrating and shaping magnetic fields. They are used throughout the magnetic industry and are often as vital in the design of a magnetic assembly as the permanent magnet.

In EMS, two important permanent magnets quantities that must be specified:

Coercivity. Coercivity or the coercive force. Commonly denoted by the letter Hc, it is the intensity of the

magnetic field needed to reduce the magnetization of a ferromagnetic material to zero after it has reached saturation. On a Hysteresis loop, it is the point where the loop intersects the H axis .The coercivity is measured in Amperes per meter (A/m) in MKS units and in Oersted in Gaussian units.

Residual Induction. Residual induction or remanence. Commonly denoted by the letter Br, it is the

amount of magnetic flux density remaining in a ferromagnetic material after an external magnetic field is removed after saturation in a closed circuit. On a Hysteresis loop, it is the point where the loop intersects the B axis. The Br represents the maximum magnetic flux density output of this material without an external magnetic field. The Residual induction is measured in Tesla for MKS units and in Gauss for Gaussian units.

There are four main types of permanent magnets that are commonly used nowadays in various magnetic applications:

NdFeB (Neodymium-Iron-Boron) -- Or the so-called 'rare-earth' permanent magnets. They are very powerful magnets as they have the highest (B, Br, BHmax) and high Hc. They are however very brittle, hard to machine, and sensitive to corrosion and high temperatures. They are generally the most expensive magnets .

Typical Magnetic Properties of NdFeB .

Grade

Residual Induction (Gauss)

Coercivity (Oersteds)

Max. Energy Prod

(MGOe)

Br Hc BHmax

N5513 15,000 12,000 55

N5214 14,700 10,300 52

N4816 14,100 12,700 48

N4221 13,200 12,000 42

N3625 12,400 11,100 36

N3430 11,900 10,700 34

Page 147: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Material Information

133

Ferrite (Ceramic) -- Or the so-called 'hard ceramic' permanent magnets. They are generally made from Strontium or Barium Ferrite. Lower in power (B, Br, BHmax) compared to other magnets, and are very brittle. However, they have very high Hc and good Tc, and are quite corrosion-resistant. A very cost-effective choice. Less expensive than NdFeB magnets, but still very powerful and resistant to demagnetization.

Typical Magnetic Properties of Ferrite.

Grade

Residual Induction (Gauss)

Coercivity (Oersteds)

Max. Energy Prod

(MGOe)

Br Hc BHmax

1 2,200 1,900 1.1

5 3,950 2,400 3.6

8 3,900 3,200 3.5

10 4,200 2,950 4.2

AlNiCo (Aluminum-Nickel-Cobalt) for medium strength and excellent machinability. They perform much better than plain steel, but are much weaker in strength (lower B, Br and BHmax). They must be carefully stored because they are prone to demagnetization.

Typical Magnetic Properties of AlNiCo .

Grade

Residual Induction (Gauss)

Coercivity (Oersteds)

Max. Energy Prod (MGOe)

Br Hc BHmax

5 Cast 12,500 640 5.5

5-7 Cast 13,500 740 7.5

6 Cast 10,500 780 3.9

8 Cast 8,300 1,650 5.5

2 Sintered

6,600 550 1.4

5 Sintered

10,800 600 3.8

8 Sintered

7,000 1,900 5.0

SmCo (Samarium Cobalt)-- Or the so-called the 'first rare earth' magnets. They have high power and resistance to high temperatures and corrosion. They are almost as powerful as NdFeB magnets, and far more powerful than all the others (high B and Br). Usually only used where resistance to high temperatures and corrosion are needed. Also very brittle and hard to machine. They are the most expensive magnets.

Typical Magnetic Properties of SmCo .

Grade

Residual Induction (Gauss)

Coercivity (Oersteds)

Max. Energy Prod (MGOe)

Br Hc BHmax

S3214 11,600 9,500 31

S2818 10,700 10,300 28

S2818 11,000 10,300 28

S2712 10,600 9,250 27

Page 148: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

134

S1809 8,600 7,200 18

All the above magnetic properties tables are from www.intemag.com

Page 149: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Material Information

135

The B-H Curve of a Material

A B-H curve or the hysteresis loop is a property of all ferromagnetic materials. As its name indicates, it is a plot of the magnetic flux density B against the magnetizing field H. It describes the cycles of magnet in a closed circuit as it reaches saturation, demagnetized, saturated in the opposite direction, and then demagnetized again under the influence of an external magnetic field.

In practice, only the B-H curve in the second quadrant or the so called the"Demagnetization Curve" is used. In particular, if the air-gap dimensions of the magnetic circuit are kept fixed and neighboring fields are help constant, the permanent magnet would have a static operating point. Else, such operating point will be any where on the demagnetization curve. In such case, the device must be designed carefully to account for the movement of the operating point.

In any magnetic device, the designer must carefully consider three quantities:

The residual induction or the remanence which is commonly denoted by the letter Br. It is the point

where the B-H curve intersects the B axis. In other words, it is always the value of flux density for the condition when a magnet develops no magnetizing force (H=0). It is measured in Tesla in MKS units and in Gauss in Gaussian units.

The Coercivity or the coercive force which is commonly denoted by the letter Hc. It is the point where

the B-H curve intersects the H axis. In other words, it is the magnetizing force required to reduce the magnet's flux density B to zero. It is measured in Amperes per meter (A/m) in MKS units and in Oersted in Gaussian units.

BHmax or the maximum energy product. It is the point where the product of magnetic flux density B and

the magnetic field H is at a maximum. Obviously, the higher is this product, the less volume of the magnet is required.

It is very important to distinguish between hard and soft magnetic materials. The hard magnetic materials which are also called permanent magnets are characterized by a B-H Curve that starts in the second quadrant and may extend to the first quadrant. Whereas the B-H Curve of soft magnetic materials is limited to the first

quadrant. Consequently, if the user enters a B-H data where the first row has a negative value for H, EMS treats that material as a permanent magnet. In such case, it automatically assigns a Coercivity (Hc) value equals to minus the negative value of H specified in the first row of the B-H data. It also assigns a Remanence (Br) value equals to that maximum B value in the specified B-H data.

Assigning a B-H Curve to a Material...

Page 150: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

136

Assigning Materials to your Model

Before running an analysis, you must define all necessary material properties required by the corresponding analysis. EMS comes with a material browser that you can use to assign material properties. It includes a default material library. You can easily add other materials and define new libraries.

To assign a material from an existing material library file:

1. In the EMS Manager tree, right-click the icon of the desired body in the Solids folder of a study and select Apply Material to All Bodies from the right-mouse menu.

2. The Material PM page opens. 3. From the Material Database pull-down menu, select the desired material library. 4. Click on (+) sign to open the desired material folder.

5. Click the desired material.

6. Click OK .

Note: After assigning a material to a component, a checkmark appears on the corresponding icon.

To add or insert a material library ...

To add a material to an existing library...

Page 151: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Material Information

137

Creating or Inserting a Materials Library

To create a new material library:

1. In the EMS Manager tree, right-click on the root (the document name).

2. Choose Material Browser. The Material PM page opens.

3. From the Material Database pull-down menu, select <New Material Library>.

4. Type name of the new library. An empty material library with the specified name is added to the Material

PM.

5. Click on Create/Edit Material.

6. Type a folder's name.

7. Type a material's name.

8. Choose the material units. The default is MKS.

9. Type the corresponding material properties.

10. Click OK

To insert an existing material library:

1. In the EMS Analysis Manager tree, right-click the assembly icon at the top of the tree and select Options.

2. Click System Options, Default Library.

3. To specify the path of material library: a. Click Add.

The Browse for Folder dialog box appears.

b. Navigate to the folder where library files exist and click OK. The library must have .emsmtr

extension. c. Click Move Up or Move Down to change the folder search order. d. Click Delete to delete a folder. To undo deleting a folder, click Cancel.

4. Click OK.

The material library whose path is specified above is now added to the material browser.

Page 152: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

138

Adding a Material to an Existing Library

To add a new material to an existing library:

1. In the EMS Manager tree, right-click on the root (the document name).

2. Choose Material Browser. The Material PM page opens.

3. From the Material Database pull-down menu, select the desired library.

4. Click on Create/Edit Material.

5. Type a folder's name.

6. Type a material's name.

7. Choose the material units. The default is MKS.

8. Type the corresponding material properties.

9. Click OK .

Page 153: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Material Information

139

Assigning a B-H Curve to a Material

Most of ferromagnetic materials exhibit a nonlinearity behavior where the permeability is function of the magnetic field H, i.e. they have a B-H curve. Practically, material manufactures provide a B-H or a magnetization curve that

gives the magnetic flux B as a function of H. The user could input the B-H curve in MKS units (B in T and H in A/m) or Gaussian units (B in Gauss and H in Oersted).

To specify a B-H curve:

1. In the EMS Manager tree, right-click the component’s icon in the Solids folder and select Apply Material

to All Bodies. The Material PM page opens.

2. From the Material Database pull-down menu, select the material library name.

3. Click on the proper folder.

4. Click on Create/Edit Material. The new material PM page opens.

5. Type the material name and choose the material units. The default is MKS.

6. Under the Relative Permeability, select Non Linear Isotropic.

7. Click on an browse for a curve database

The function curves PropertyManager opens.

5. Click Browse and open the .emscur curves library defined in Function Curves section .

6. In the Curve Library box, do one of the following: 1. Select an existing B-H Curve from the available curves in the current library. 2. Right-click B-H Curve and select Create Curve to define a new B-H curve. The created curve

will be saved in the current library. In such case, you can either type pair of data in the table or click on File and read in a text file.

7. click OK

Note: A B-H curve that starts in the second quadrant is treated by EMS as a permanent magnet or hard magnetic

material. In other words, if the user enters a B-H data where the first row has a negative value for H, EMS treats that material as a permanent magnet. In such case, it automatically assigns a Coercivity (Hc) value equals to minus the negative value of H specified in the first row of the B-H data. It also assigns a Remanence (Br) value

equals to that maximum B value in the specified B-H data.

The B-H Curve of a Material...

Page 154: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

140

Assigning a Permanent Magnet

A permanent magnet has both magnitude and direction. The magnitude is a material property. The direction depends on how the north and south poles of the magnet are positioned relative to the model. Therefore, the assignment of a permanent magnet is carried out in 2 steps. The first step consists of specifying the coercivity and remanence of the magnet. The second step consists of fixing the easy direction of the magnet relative to a coordinate system.

To define a permanent magnet:

1. In the EMS Manager tree, right-click on the root (project name).

2. Choose Material Browser. The Material PM page opens.

3. From the Material Database pull-down menu, select the desired library.

4. Click on Create/Edit Material.

5. Type the a folder's name.

6. Type the material name and choose the material units. The default is MKS.

7. Take the default values for material properties. Do not specify any values for the permeability and the

permittivity.

8. Scroll down to the Magnetization box and select Permanent Magnetization for the pull-down menu.

9. Type the value of the Coercivity and of the Remanence. Pay attention to the units.

10. Click OK .

To fix the easy direction of the permanent magnet relative to a coordinate system:

1. Right-click on the body and select Direction of Coercivity. The click is on the body and not the component. 2. In the Coordinate System box, check the coordinate system in which the direction of coercivity is

defined. The default is the global coordinate system. 3. If you checked a local coordinate system, click inside the Local Coordinate System box. and choose an

existing local coordinate system. If such local system is not defined yet, exit the Direction of Coercivity dialogue altogether and define a local coordinate system by using Insert->Reference Geometry-> Coordinate System and then repeat steps 1-3.

4. In the Direction Type box, check Cartesian, Cylindrical, or Spherical type. The default is Cartesian. 5. In the Direction box, click on the desired direction relative to that coordinate system. For example, the

possible directions for a Cartesian system is +x, -x, +y, -y, +z, or -z.

6. Click OK .

Page 155: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Material Information

141

Assigning an Orthotropic Material

A material is orthotropic if its electrical or magnetic properties are unique and independent in three mutually

perpendicular directions. Furthermore, the effective material tensor also depends on how it is placed relative to the model. Therefore, the assignment of an orthotropic material is carried out in 2 steps. The first step consists of specifying the diagonal properties along the three orthogonal axes of the material. The second step consists of specifying the local coordinate system that defines the three orthogonal axes.

To define the material properties along the three axes:

1. In the EMS Manager tree, right-click on the root (project name).

2. Choose Material Browser. The Material PM page opens.

3. From the Material Database pull-down menu, select the desired library.

4. Click on Create/Edit Material.

5. Type the a folder's name.

6. Type the material name and choose the material units. The default is MKS.

7. Depending on the material, select Orthotropic under Relative Permeability, Relative Permittivity, or

Electric Conductivity boxes. Actually for Magnetic studies, only orthotropic permeability matters. Vice

versa, for Electric studies, only the orthotropic permittivity does. The conductivity could be orthotropic for

Electric Conduction studies but not for Magnetic studies. Whereas for Electric studies the

conductivity does not play any role because the components are assumed either perfectly conducting or

perfectly insulating.

8. Specify the value of the corresponding quantity along the three orthogonal axes of the material.

9. Click OK .

To specify the material local coordinate system:

1. Right-click on the body and select Coordinate System. The click is on the body and not the component. 2. In the Coordinate System box, check the coordinate system in which the three mutually orthogonal axes are

defined. The default is the global coordinate system. 3. If you checked a local coordinate system, click inside the Local Coordinate System box. and choose an

existing local coordinate system. If such local system is not defined yet, exit the Coordinate System dialogue altogether and define a local coordinate system by using Insert->Reference Geometry-> Coordinate System and then repeat steps 1-3.

4. Click OK .

Page 156: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

142

Using Drag and Drop to Define Materials

Once you defined material(s) for a study (source study), you can use drag and drop (or copy and paste) to define materials for another study (target study) in one of the following ways:

Drag the Solids folder of an existing study (source study) and drop it on a compatible target study. All material assignments in the source Solids folders will be copied to the target study.

Drag an icon in the Solids folder of a source study to the Solids folder of a compatible target study.

Use copy and paste to copy materials from one study to another.

Page 157: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

143

Function Curves

About Function Curves

Function curves define pairs of values for use by different types of studies. The Function Curves dialog lets you create and edit curve libraries.

NOTE: We recommend that you use this dialog to include all your frequently used curves to a library so that you

can use them conveniently in other studies and documents.

Curve Library. Click Open to load an existing library file or create a new one by pushing the New button.

The following types of function curves are available:

I-t Curve - Current-Time curve defines the current variation with time to be used in coils for

transient magnetic studies.

B-H Curve - defines the variation of the magnetic flux density versus the magnetic field for

ferromagnetic materials and permanent magnets.

P-B Curve - defines the variation of the magnetic flux density versus the magnetic field for

ferromagnetic materials and permanent magnets.

Vt Curve - defines the variation of the magnetic flux density versus the magnetic field for

ferromagnetic materials and permanent magnets.

The following topics are covered in this section:

Creating or Editing a Curve Library

Viewing a Curve Library

Page 158: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

144

Creating or Editing a Curve Library

To create a new Curve Library or edit an existing one:

1. In the EMS Manager tree, right-click the top icon and select Define Function Curves.

The Function Curves dialog box appears.

2. Click Open to select an existing library file or click New to enter a name for a new library. The extension

of EMS Curve libraries is emscur. 3. In the Curve Library box, do one of the following:

Right-click I-t Curve and select Create Curve to define a current-time curve.

Right-click B-H Curve and select Create Curve to define a B-H curve.

Right-click P-B Curve and select Create Curve to define a P-B curve.

Right-click Vt Curve and select Create Curve to define a Vt curve. 4. In the Curve Name box, select the name of an existing curve to edit or a enter a name for a new curve. 5. In the Curve Data box, do the following:

Depending on the curve type, specify required units.

To import a curve from an external text file, click Import and browse

NOTE: The format of the file depends on the type of the curve.

To add a new row, double-click in the Point column.

Fill in the columns as desired.

To delete a row, highlight it and click the Delete key or right-click it and select Delete.

6. Click View to create a graph of the curve 7. Repeat steps 3 through 6 to define as many curves as desired and then click OK. 8. Click Save to save the library. You can use the curves in the library in any study.

Page 159: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Function Curves

145

Viewing a Curve Library

To view a curve library :

1. In the EMS Manager tree, right-click the top icon and select Define Function Curves.

The Function Curves dialog box appears.

2. Click Open to select an existing library or push the New button to enter a name for the new library. The

extension of EMS Curve library files is emscur. 3. In the Curve Library box, select the desired curve.

4. The curve data appears in the table and a graph appears in the Preview area. 5. Click OK.

Page 160: EMS_UserGuide.pdf
Page 161: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

147

Loads and Restraints

Loads and Restraints

Loads and restraints are necessary to define the electric and magnetic environment of the model. The results of analysis directly depend on the specified loads and restraints. Loads and restraints are applied to geometric entities as features that are fully associative to geometry and automatically adjust to geometric changes.

For example, if you apply a voltage to a face, all the nodes of that face are assigned the applied voltage. If you modify the geometry such that the area of the face is changed, then again all the nodes of that face are assigned that same applied voltage. Nevertheless, remeshing the model is required after any change in geometry to update loads and restraints.

When you create a study, the program creates a Load/Restraint folder in the EMS Manager tree. EMS adds an item in the Load/Restraint folder for each load or restraint you define on one or more entities.

The types of loads and restraints available depend on the type of the study. A load or restraint is applied by the corresponding PropertyManager accessible by right-clicking the Load/Restraint folder of a study in the EMS Manager tree, or by clicking EMS, Loads/Restraint.

NOTE: To help you define studies faster, you can drag and drop Load/Restraint folders and items from one study to another compatible study in the EMS Manager tree. You can also copy studies and other folders and items.

The following topics are discussed in this section:

Fixed Voltage

Floating Conductor

Contact Resistance

Charge Density

Total Charge

Normal Flux

Temperature

Convection

Heat Flux

Volume Heat

Summary of Loads and Restraints

Page 162: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

148

Fixed Voltage

The fixed voltage restraint or boundary condition imposes a voltage on a face, component, or body. All the nodes of the restrained face, component, or body are assigned the specified voltage. This type of restraint is only applicable to Electrostatic and Electric Conduction analyses.

To apply a fixed voltage:

1. In a study, right-click the Load/Restraint folder and select Fixed Voltage.

-or-

click Fixed Voltage on the EMS toolbar.

-or-

click EMS, Loads/Restraint, Fixed Voltage.

The Fixed Voltage PropertyManager appears. This type of restraint is applicable on faces and bodies.

2. Click inside the Faces for Voltage box then select the face to which you want to apply the fixed

voltage.

3. Click inside the Components or Bodies for Voltage box then select the components or

bodies to which you want to apply the fixed voltage. 4. Type the voltage value in the Voltage value box in volts.

5. Click OK .

Remember that this type of condition is applicable only to Electrostatic and Electric Conduction analyses.

Page 163: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Loads and Restraints

149

Floating Conductor

The floating conductor restraint has an unspecified voltage value. It is treated differently depending whether the capacitance matrix is computed or not. That is, if the capacitance matrix is requested, the simulator assigns 1.0 or 0 V on the floating conductors and computes the matrix using the stored electric energy. On the other hand, if the capacitance matrix is not requested, the floating conductor is treated as an equi-potential entity with unknown voltage value, and thus solved for. Consequently, to treat the voltage on a floating conductor as unknown, the capacitance matrix shall not be requested.

To apply a floating conductor:

1. In a study, right-click the Load/Restraint folder and select Floating Conductor.

-or-

click Floating Conductor on the EMS toolbar.

-or-

click EMS, Loads/Restraint, Floating Conductor.

The Floating Conductor PropertyManager appears. This type of restraint is applicable on faces and bodies.

2. Click inside the Faces for Floating Conductor box then select the face to which you want to

apply the fixed voltage.

3. Click inside the Components or Bodies for Floating Conductor box then select the

components or bodies to which you want to label as floating conductor.

4. Click OK .

Remember that this type of condition is applicable only to Electrostatic analyses.

Page 164: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

150

Contact Resistance

The Contact Resistance, in Ohms per square, load imposes a contact resistance on a face. It is used only for Electric Conduction analysis.

To apply a Contact Resistance:

1. In a study, right-click the Load/Restraint folder and select Contact Resistance.

-or-

click Contact Resistance on the EMS toolbar.

-or-

click EMS, Loads/Restraint, Contact Resistance.

The Contact Resistance PropertyManager appears. This type of restraint is applicable on faces and bodies.

2. Click inside the Faces for Contact Resistance box then select the face to which you want to

specify a contact resistance. 3. Type the value of the contact resistance in the Contact Resistance box. Its unit is in Ohms per

square.

4. Click OK .

Remember that this type of condition is applicable only to Electric Conduction analyses.

Page 165: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Loads and Restraints

151

Charge Density

The charge density, in Coulombs per meter cubic (C/m3), load imposes a uniform charge distribution on

a component or body. This type of load is only applicable to Electrostatic analysis.

To apply a charge density:

1. In a study, right-click the Load/Restraint folder and select Charge Density.

-or-

click Charge Density on the EMS toolbar.

-or-

click EMS, Loads/Restraint, Charge Density.

The Charge Density PropertyManager appears. This type of restraint is applicable on faces and bodies.

2. Click inside the Components or Bodies for Charge Density box then select the components or

bodies to which you want to apply a charge density. 3. Type the value of the charge density in the Charge Density box. Its unit is in C/m

3

4. Click OK .

Remember that this type of condition is applicable only to Electrostatic analyses.

Page 166: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

152

Total Charge

The total charge , in Coulombs (C), load imposes a uniform charge distribution on a component or body. This type of load is only applicable to Electrostatic analysis.

To apply a total charge :

1. In a study, right-click the Load/Restraint folder and select Total Charge .

-or-

click Total Charge on the EMS toolbar.

-or-

click EMS, Loads/Restraint, Total Charge .

The Total Charge PropertyManager appears. This type of restraint is applicable on faces and bodies.

2. Click inside the Components or Bodies for Total Charge box then select the components or

bodies to which you want to apply a charge density. 3. Type the value of the charge density in the Total Charge box. Its unit is in C

4. Click OK .

Remember that this type of condition is applicable only to Electrostatic analyses.

Page 167: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Loads and Restraints

153

Normal Flux

The Normal Flux boundary condition (NFBC) imposes a normal flux, i.e. tangential flux is zero, on a face.

Symmetry plane: If the model is symmetric and the flux density is normal to the plane of symmetry, use

this type of boundary condition. You can use symmetry to model a portion of the model instead of the full model. When appropriate, taking advantage of symmetry can help you reduce the size of the problem and obtain more accurate results.

This type of boundary condition is applicable to magnetic analyses only , i.e. Magnetostatic, AC Magnetic, and Transient Magnetic.

To apply a normal flux:

1. In a study, right-click the Load/Restraint folder and select Normal Flux.

-or-

click Normal Flux on the EMS toolbar.

-or-

click EMS, Loads/Restraint, Normal Flux.

The Normal Flux PropertyManager appears. This type of restraint is applicable on faces and bodies.

2. Click inside the Faces for Normal Flux box then select the face to which you want to apply the

fixed voltage.

3. Click OK .

Remember that this type of condition is applicable only to Magnetostatic, AC Magnetic and Transient Magnetic analyses.

Page 168: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

154

Modifying Loads and Restraints

To modify any load or restraint

1. In the EMS Manager tree, right-click the corresponding load or restraint that you want to modify and select

Edit Definition.

The proper PropertyManager appears.

2. Make the desired changes.

3. Click OK .

Page 169: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Loads and Restraints

155

Thermal Loads & Restraints

Temperature

The Temperature PropertyManager lets you define temperature boundary condition for use with thermal analysis. This type of restraint is only applicable to Electric Conduction, Magnetostatic, AC Magnetic and Transient Magnetic analyses. The thermal solution option must be enabled in the study's Properties.

To apply a fixed temperature:

1. In a study, right-click the Load/Restraint folder and select Thermal >> Temperature.

-or-

click Temperature on the EMS toolbar.

-or-

click EMS, Loads/Restraint, Thermal, Temperature on the main menu.

The Temperature PropertyManager appears. This type of restraint is applicable on faces and bodies.

2. Click inside the Faces box then select the face to which you want to apply the temperature.

3. Click inside the Components or Bodies box then select the components or bodies to which you

want to apply the temperature. 4. Under Temperature, do the following:

Set Temperature to the desired value.

Set Units to the units you want to use to enter the temperature value.

5. Click OK .

Remember that this type of thermal condition is applicable only to Electric Conduction, Magnetostatic , AC Magnetic and Transient Magnetic analyses. The thermal solution option must be enabled in the study's

Properties.

Page 170: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

156

Convection

Use the Convection PropertyManager to apply convection boundary condition to selected components and bodies of the model. This type of restraint is only applicable to Electric Conduction, Magnetostatic, AC Magnetic and Transient Magnetic analyses. The thermal solution option must be enabled in the study's Properties.

To apply a convection:

1. In a study, right-click the Load/Restraint folder and select Thermal >> Convection.

-or-

click Convection on the EMS toolbar.

-or-

click EMS, Loads/Restraint, Thermal, Convection on the main menu.

The Convection PropertyManager appears. This type of restraint is applicable on faces only.

2. Click inside the Components or Bodies box then select the components and bodies to which

you want to apply the convection. 3. Under Convection properties, do the following:

Type a value for the Convection Coefficient in the selected unit system.

Type a value for the Bulk Ambient Temperature

Set Units to the desired unit system.

4. Click OK .

Remember that this type of thermal condition is applicable only to Electric Conduction, Magnetostatic , AC Magnetic and Transient Magnetic analyses. The thermal solution option must be enabled in the study's

Properties.

Page 171: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Loads and Restraints

157

Heat Flux

The Heat Flux PropertyManager lets you apply heat flux to the selected faces. This type of restraint is only applicable to Electric Conduction, Magnetostatic, AC Magnetic and Transient Magnetic analyses. The thermal solution option must be enabled in the study's Properties.

To apply a heat flux:

1. In a study, right-click the Load/Restraint folder and select Thermal >> Heat Flux.

-or-

click Heat Flux on the EMS toolbar.

-or-

click EMS, Loads/Restraint, Thermal, Heat Flux.

The Heat Flux PropertyManager appears. This type of restraint is applicable on faces only.

2. Click inside the Faces box then select the face to which you want to apply the Heat Flux.

3. Under Heat Flux, do the following:

Type a value for the Heat Flux . in the selected unit system.

Set Units to the desired unit system.

Check Reverse direction box if desired

4. Click OK .

Remember that this type of thermal condition is applicable only to Electric Conduction, Magnetostatic , AC Magnetic and Transient Magnetic analyses. The thermal solution option must be enabled in the study's

Properties.

Page 172: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

158

Volume Heat

The Volume Heat PropertyManager lets you define Volume Heat boundary condition to the bodies and components for use with thermal analysis. This type of restraint is only applicable to Electric Conduction, Magnetostatic, AC Magnetic and Transient Magnetic analyses. The thermal solution option must be enabled in the study's Properties.

To apply a volume heat:

1. In a study, right-click the Load/Restraint folder and select Thermal >> Volume Heat.

-or-

click Volume Heat on the EMS toolbar.

-or-

click EMS, Loads/Restraint, Thermal, Volume Heat on the main menu.

The Temperature PropertyManager appears. This type of restraint is applicable on bodies and components.

1.

2. Click inside the Components or Bodies box then select the components or bodies to which you

want to apply the volume heat. 3. Under Volume Heat, do the following:

Type a value for the Volume Heat . in the selected unit system.

Set Units to the desired unit system.

4. Click OK .

Remember that this type of thermal condition is applicable only to Electric Conduction, Magnetostatic , AC Magnetic and Transient Magnetic analyses. The thermal solution option must be enabled in the study's

Properties.

Page 173: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Loads and Restraints

159

Summary of Loads and Restraints

The following table summarizes the loads and restraints and their application conditions.

LOAD/RESTRAINT ANALYSIS TYPE GEOMETRICAL ENTITY REQUIRED INPUT UNITS

Fixed Voltage Electrostatic

Electric Conduction

Faces

Components

Bodies

Voltage Volts

Floating Conductor

Electrostatic

Faces

Components

Bodies

Conductor Number None

Charge Density

Electrostatic Components

Bodies Charge Density C/m

3

Contact Resistance

Electric Conduction

Faces Contact Resistance Ohms/Square

Normal Flux

Magnetostatic

AC Magnetic

Transient Magnetic

Faces

None

N/A

THERMAL

LOAD/RESTRAINT

Temperature

Magnetostatic

AC Magnetic

Electrostatic

Electric Conduction

Faces

Components

Bodies

Temperature

Kelvin

Fahrenheit

Celsius

Convection

Magnetostatic

AC Magnetic

Electrostatic

Electric Conduction

Faces

Convection Coefficient

Bulk Temperature

SI

English (IPS)

Metric (G)

Heat Flux

Magnetostatic

AC Magnetic

Electrostatic

Electric Conduction

Faces

Heat Flux

SI

English (IPS)

Metric (G)

Volume Heat

Magnetostatic

AC Magnetic

Electrostatic

Electric Conduction

Components

Bodies

Temperature

Kelvin

Fahrenheit

Celsius

Page 174: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

160

Page 175: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

161

Coils

About Coils

A coil literally means a multiple-turn winding of a conductor such as copper wire wound around a bobbin. When the conducting windings carry current, a magnetic field is produced. In the context of EMS, it can also mean a solid or a volume conductor carrying a current that produces a magnetic field. We make the distinction between the former and the latter by calling them wound or stranded and solid coils, respectively.

When you create a Magnetic study, the program creates a Coils folder in the EMS Manager tree. EMS adds an item in the Coils folder for each coil you define on one or more entities.

The coil properties depend on the type of the Magnetic study. A coil is applied by the corresponding PropertyManager accessible by right-clicking the Coils folder of a Magnetic study in the EMS Manager tree, or by clicking EMS, Coils.

NOTE: To help you define studies faster, you can drag and drop Coils folders and items from one study to another

compatible study in the EMS Manager tree. You can also copy studies and other folders and items.

The following topics are discussed in this section:

Wound and Solid Coils

Coil Properties

Adding a Coil

Modifying a Coil

Summary of Coils

Page 176: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

162

Wound and Solid Coils

A wound, or sometimes called stranded, coil is a multiple-turn winding of a conductor such as copper wire wound around a bobbin. Whereas a solid or a volume coil is made of one bulk piece of conductor carrying a net current. The total current flowing in a wound coil is just the current per turn multiplied by the number of turns (I = N*Current/PerTurn). Whereas in a solid conductor, the total current is simply net current I flowing through it. If the net current is the same, what is really the difference? It depends on the study type.

Magnetostatic Study

There is no induced current for Magnetostatic studies, thus the total current in the coil is just the applied current. On the cross section of a wound coil, the applied current density is uniform. It is varying on a solid coil. Consequently, the resulting field can be slightly different. However, the value of inductance is completely different because it depends on the number of turns.

AC and Transient Magnetic Studies

For AC and Transient Magnetic studies, it is very important to make to the distinction between a wound and a solid coil. The diameter of a wire turn is usually much smaller than the Skin Depth. In addition, individual turns are

separated by an insulting cover. Thus, a wound coil does not support Eddy Currents, i.e. induced currents. On the other hand, a solid coil supports Eddy currents because the size of the conductor is usually larger than a Skin Depth. The Eddy currents usually flow in opposite direction to the applied current in the coil.

Remember that coils are defined for Magnetic analyses only .

Page 177: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Coils

163

Coil Properties

Coils are defined only for Magnetic analyses, i.e. Magnetostatic, AC and Transient Magnetic. There is no limit on the number of coils in a model. For each coil the net current as well as entry and exit ports must specified, as explained below.

Net Current

In EMS, a coil must be current driven and a net current must be specified. Therefore, if you know the voltage, you must obtain the corresponding net current because you won't be able to specify a voltage. If the coil is wound, both the number of turns and the current per turn must be specified. In such case, the net current is simply: I = Number of turns*Current/PerTurn. As for a solid coil, the net flowing current shall be specified. The current form depends on the analysis type, as follows:

Magnetostatic: Specify just the magnitude of the current.

AC Magnetic: Specify both the magnitude and phase of the current.

Transient Magnetic: Specify a function curve that gives the current as a function of time.

Entry and Exit Ports

The net current does not give information about the direction of current flow in the coil. It is the current density that gives such information. Therefore, it is necessary to specify an Entry Port and Exit Port of the coil. Such ports must be planar and can be made up of many faces. The current density flows orthogonally into the Entry Port and out of the Exit Port. Thus the ports specification gives the direction of the current flow. How about loop coils or the so-called multiply connected coils? How to specify their ports?

Loops or closed Coils

Loop coils must be taken into consideration at the level of geometry creation. A planar port composed of one or many faces where the current density flows orthogonal to must be made accessible. The following steps shall be followed:

Divide the coil to at least to two separate components to have an inside face where an entry port condition can be applied.

Hide one of the coil components in such away that the entry port face is visible and easily accessible.

For the Exit Port, check the "Same as Entry Port".

Bear in mind that the current flow convention: The current always flows into the Entry Port .

An example of a multiply-connected coil where it is broken to two parts

Page 178: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

164

Entry and Exit Ports are planar faces. The current always flows into the Entry Port .

Page 179: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Coils

165

Current-Time Curve

For Transient Magnetic analysis, the current in the coil varies as function of time. Therefore, a current-time function curve must be defined instead of a just a current quantity. The current-time curve may be defined even

before the creation of the coil and later imported into the coil when it is created. It can equally be defined with the coil creation.

Page 180: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

166

Adding a Coil

Coils are defined for Magnetic analyses. The process of adding a coil in EMS is about the same for all Magnetic studies. However, there is a slight variation between wound and solid coils and the current form for different analyses. Follow the links below to add a coil for the various analysis types:

Adding a coil to a Magnetostatic study

Adding a coil to an AC Magnetic study

Adding a coil to a Transient Magnetic study

Page 181: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Coils

167

Adding a Coil to Magnetostatic study

The only difference between a Wound and a Solid coil is the number of turns. Therefore, both procedures are given below:

To add a coil to a Magnetostatic study:

1. In a study, right-click the Coils folder and select Wound or Solid.

-or-

click Wound or Solid on the EMS Loads toolbar.

-or-

click EMS, Coils , Wound or Solid.

The Coils PropertyManager appears.

2. Select the coil type: o Current Driven Coil o Voltage Driven Coil

3. Enter extra Coil General Properties: o Enter the fraction of this coil with respect to the actual coil. e.g. if you are modeling half of the

actual coil , enter 0.5. o In case of a wound coil, enter either the AWG (American wire gage) value or the wire diameter..

4. Click inside the Components or Bodies for Coils box then select the components or bodies to

which you want to add to the coil

5. Click inside the Faces for Entry Port box then select the faces that make up the Entry Port. 6. If the coil is a closed loop, check Same as Entry Port in Exit Port selection list.

7. If it is not a closed loop, click inside the Faces for Exit Port box then select the faces that make up the

Exit Port. 8. In case of Wound Coil:

o Type the number of turns in the Turns box . It is an integer. o If current driven coil option is selected, Type the value of the current per turn in the Current per

Turn box . The units in Amp-Turns. o If voltage driven coil option is selected, type the voltage driven properties ( voltage and serial

resistance) values. 9. In case of Solid Coil :

o If current driven coil option is selected, type the value of the net current in the Net Current box

. The units in Amps. o If voltage driven coil option is selected, type the voltage driven properties ( voltage and serial

resistance) values.

10. Click OK

Page 182: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

168

Adding a Coil to an AC Magnetic Study

The only difference between a Wound and a Solid coil is the number of turns. Therefore, both procedures are given below.

To add a coil to an AC Magnetic study:

1. In a study, right-click the Coils folder and select Wound or Solid.

-or-

click Wound or Solid on the EMS Loads toolbar.

-or-

click EMS, Coils , Wound or Solid.

The Coils PropertyManager appears.

2. Select the coil type :

o Current Driven Coil o Voltage Driven Coil

3. Enter extra Coil General Properties:

o Enter the fraction of this coil with respect to the actual coil. e.g. if you are modeling half of the

actual coil , enter 0.5. o In case of a wound coil, enter either the AWG (American wire gage) value or the wire diameter.

4. Click inside the Components or Bodies for Coils box then select the components or bodies to which you want to add to the coil.

5. Click inside the Faces for Entry Port box then select the faces that make up the Entry Port. 6. If the coil is a closed loop, check Same as Entry Port in Exit Port selection list.

7. If it is not a closed loop, click inside the Faces for Exit Port box then select the faces that make up the

Exit Port. 8. In case of Wound Coil:

o Type the number of turns in the Turns box . It is an integer. o If current driven coil option is selected, type the value of the current per turn in the RMS Current per

Turn box . The units in Amp-Turns.

9. In case of Solid Coil and current driven coil option is selected, type the value of the net current in the

Net RMS Current box . The units in Amps.

Page 183: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Coils

169

10. In case of Solid or Wound coil and current driven coil option is selected, type the value of the phase

in the Current phase box . The units in degrees.

11. In case of Solid or Wound coil and if voltage driven coil option is selected, type the voltage driven properties:

o Enter the RMS voltage value.

o Enter the voltage phase box . The units in degrees. o Enter the serial resistance value in Ohms.

o Enter the serial inductance value -Henry. o Enter the serial capacitance value in pF (1e-12F)

12. Click OK .

Page 184: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

170

Adding a Coil to a Transient Magnetic Study

The only difference between a Wound and a Solid coil is the number of turns. Therefore, both procedures are given below:

To add a coil to a Transient Magnetic study:

1. In a study, right-click the Coils folder and select Wound or Solid.

-or-

click Wound or Solid on the EMS Loads toolbar.

-or-

click EMS, Coils , Wound or Solid.

The Coils PropertyManager appears.

2. Select the coil type: o Current Driven Coil o Voltage Driven Coil

3. Enter extra Coil General Properties: o In case of a wound coil, enter either the AWG (American wire gage) value or the wire diameter.. o Enter the fraction of this coil with respect to the actual coil. e.g. if you are modeling half of the

actual coil , enter 0.5.

4. Click inside the Components or Bodies for Coils box then select the components or bodies to which you want to add to the coil.

5. Click inside the Faces for Entry Port box then select the faces that make up the Entry Port. 6. If the coil is a closed loop, check Same as Entry Port in Exit Port selection list.

7. If it is not a closed loop, click inside the Faces for Exit Port box then select the faces that make up the

Exit Port.

8. In case of Wound coil , type the number of turns in the Turns box . It is an integer. 9. In case of Solid or Wound coil and If voltage driven coil option is selected, type the voltage driven

properties: o Enter the serial resistance value in Ohms.

o Enter the serial inductance value in -Henry.. o Enter the serial capacitance value in pF (1e-12F)

10. In case of Solid or Wound coil and if voltage driven coil option is selected,

o Select function from the list of voltage functions o DC Voltage o Exponential Voltage o Pulse Voltage o SFFM Voltage o Sinusoidal Voltage o Imported Voltage-Time Curve

Page 185: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Coils

171

o Fill extra field values belonging to the selected function.

11. In case of Solid or Wound coil and If current driven coil option is selected: o Select function from the list of current functions

o DC Current Source o Exponential Current Source o Pulse Current Source o SFFM Current Source o Sinusoidal Current Source o Imported Current-Time Curve

o Fill extra field values belonging to the selected function. 12. In case of Imported Current-Time Curve selected as current source:

o click to add a curve from a curve database button from the Current-Time Curve box . This command will place you in the Function Curves dialogue box.

o In the Function Curves dialogue box, click Browse to select an existing library or enter a name for the

new library. The extension of EMS Curve libraries is emscur. o In the Curve Library box, do one of the following:

Select an existing I-t Curve from the available curves in the current library.

Right-click I-t Curve and select Create Curve to define a new current-time curve. The created

curve will be saved in the current library. o Click OK in the Function Curves dialogue box will take you back to Coils PropertyManager. The

current-time curve that you just added or defined will appear in the Curve Preview box.

13. Click OK

Page 186: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

172

Modifying a Coil

To modify a coil

1. In the EMS Manager tree, right-click the corresponding coil that you want to modify and select Edit

Definition.

The proper PropertyManager appears.

2. Make the desired changes.

3. Click OK .

Page 187: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Coils

173

Summary of Coils

The following table summarizes the coils and their properties.

Page 188: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

174

Page 189: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Coils

175

You can have a coil with a zero net current. Useful, if you have a receiving coil where you want to compute the induced voltage.

Page 190: EMS_UserGuide.pdf
Page 191: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

177

Forces and Torques

About Forces and Torques

The majority of electromagnetic devices convert electromagnetic energy to mechanical energy or vice versa. Practically speaking, there is a vast number of motors and generators that use this same principal. In these devices, we attempt to generate mechanical forces such that the moving parts of the device can perform work. Similarly, there are other types of devices that convert one form of electric energy to another such as transformers, converts, and inverts.

EMS computes force distributions on each node in the appropriate regions which depends on the analysis type. For instance, the nodal force distribution is computed only for fixed-voltage conductors in case of Electrostatic analysis; while it is computed for all coils and ferromagnetic media when it comes to Magnetostatic analysis. This

type of force is automatically computed without any input from the user. After a successful run, the program creates a Force Distribution folder in the EMS Manager tree. The user can then right-click on the folder and

define the desired force distribution plot. In other words, the user input for this type of force is after running the study.

EMS also computes the so called the rigid body force. Unlike the force distribution method, this type of force actually requires the user input before running the study. That is, the user has to decide a priori on which components the force and torque shall be computed. EMS makes it convenient by creating a Forces/Torques

folder in the Manager tree for all study types except for Electric Conduction. EMS adds an item in the Forces/Torques folder for each force set you define on one or more entities. It is worth mentioning that the rigid body must be completely enclosed by air. The output for this type of calculation, which is included in the study report and results table, is a force/torque vector for each force set.

A force/torque is applied by the corresponding PropertyManager accessible by right-clicking the Forces/Torques folder of a study in the EMS Manager tree, or by clicking EMS, Forces/Torques.

NOTE: To help you define studies faster, you can drag and drop Forces/Torques folders and items from one study to another compatible study in the EMS Manager tree. You can also copy studies and other folders and items.

The following topics are discussed in this section:

Force Computation Methods

Computing a Force/Torque

Modifying a Force/Torque

Summary of Force/Torque

Page 192: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

178

Forces can be calculated in several ways including:

The Lorentz Force or JxB Method

The Virtual Work Method

The Maxwell Stress Method (Not used in CosmosEMS)

The Lorentz Force Method

The method is used to calculate the force acting on a conductor carrying a current I and located in a magnetic field whose magnetic flux density is B. That is,

J is the current density either input and therefore known or computed in an eddy current region.

Similarly, the torque is given by

It is worth clarifying a possible confusion here. That is, for AC magnetic analysis both J and B are complex

quantities and are time dependent in the form of ejt. The force calculated by the program is the time average force which is given by:

This Lorentz method is very useful for finding forces acting on conductors. However, it is of limited use for non-conducting regions.

The Virtual Work Method

This method consists of finding the change in the total magnetic energy when the object is displaced a distance s in the direction of the force component we week. That is, the force in the s direction is

where

The torque is obtained by rotating the component a around x-, y-, or z-axis.

Page 193: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Forces and Torques

179

This method of force calculation is well suited since the finite element method starts for an energy minimization any way. Furthermore, since the stored magnetic energy is global quantity, it is rather less sensitive to local errors.

Again for AC Magnetic analysis, we calculate the time average of the force.

The Maxwell Stress Method

The Maxwell Stress Method uses the magnetic field H on the surface of the object. That is,

This method is generally yields good results but it is very sensitive to local errors which make it unstable, especially in very small air gaps. For this reason, EMS does not use it for force calculation.

Page 194: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

180

Force Computation Methods

Electromagnetic forces and torques can be calculated in several ways including:

The Lorentz Force or JxB Method

The Virtual Work Method

The Maxwell Stress Method (Not used in CosmosEMS)

The Lorentz Force Method

The method is used to calculate the force acting on a conductor carrying a current I and located in a magnetic field whose magnetic flux density is B. That is,

J is the current density either input and therefore known or computed in an eddy current region.

Similarly, the torque is given by

It is worth clarifying a possible confusion here. That is, for AC magnetic analysis both J and B are complex

quantities and are time dependent in the form of ejt

. The force calculated by the program is the time average force which is given by:

This Lorentz method is very useful for finding forces acting on conductors. However, it is of limited use for non-conducting regions.

In EMS, it is available for Magnetostatic, AC and Transient Magnetic studies.

The Virtual Work Method

This method consists of finding the change in the total magnetic energy when the object is displaced a distance s in the direction of the force component we week. That is, the force in the s direction is

where

Page 195: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Forces and Torques

181

The torque is obtained by rotating the component a around x-, y-, or z-axis.

This method of force calculation is well suited since the finite element method starts for an energy minimization any way. Furthermore, since the stored magnetic energy is global quantity, it is rather less sensitive to local errors.

Again for AC Magnetic analysis, we calculate the time average of the force.

In EMS, it is available for all type of studies except the Electric Conduction.

The Maxwell Stress Method

The Maxwell Stress Method uses the magnetic field H on the surface of the object. That is,

This method is generally yields good results but it is very sensitive to local errors which make it unstable, especially in very small air gaps. For this reason, EMS does not use it for force calculation.

Page 196: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

182

Computing a Force/Torque

EMS automatically computes the nodal force distribution without any user input. However, for the rigid body force calculation the user must decide before hand which parts that constitute the rigid body on which the force/torque shall be calculated. The following steps highlight the procedure for choosing a force that must be followed before running the study.

To define a force set:

1. In a study, right-click the Forces/Torques folder and select Virtual Work or Lorentz Force.

-or-

click Virtual Work or Lorentz Force on the EMS toolbar.

-or-

click EMS, Forces/Torques, Virtual Work or Lorentz Force.

The Forces/Torques PropertyManager appears.

2. Click inside the Components and Bodies for Forces/Torques box then select the components

and bodies that make up the rigid body. 3. By default the torque center is at the origin of the global coordinate system. If a center other than the

origin is desired, check At another Point in the Torque Center selection list. Then click inside the

Point for Torque Center box then select a point. The point must already exist.

4. Click OK .

Remember that Force/Torque is applicable only to Electrostatic , Magnetostatic , AC Magnetic and Transient Magnetic analyses. The thermal solution option must be enabled in the study's Properties.

Page 197: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Forces and Torques

183

Modifying a Force/Torque

To modify a force/torque set:

1. In the EMS Manager tree, right-click the corresponding force/torque set that you want to modify and select

Edit Definition.

The proper PropertyManager appears.

2. Make the desired changes.

3. Click OK .

Page 198: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

184

Summary of Forces/Torques

EMS automatically computes the nodal force distribution without any user input. However, for the rigid body force calculation the user must decide before hand which parts that constitute the rigid body on which the force/torque shall be calculated. The following table gives a summary of force and torque calculations for rigid bodies:

ANALYSIS TYPE VIRTUAL

WORK LORENTZ

FORCE REMARKS

Electrostatic YES NO The rigid body must be completely enclosed by air.

A rigid body could be made up of many components and bodies.

By default, the torque center is at the global origin (0,0,0).

The force is output in Newtons and the torque in Newton-meters.

The force and torques vectors are included in the study report.

Electric Conduction

NO NO

Magnetostatic YES YES

AC Magnetic YES YES

Transient Magnetic

YES YES

Page 199: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

185

Resistance

About Resistance

Electrical resistance is a measure of the extent to which an object opposes the flow of an electric current. It is equal to voltage/current. The MKS unit of electrical resistance is the ohm. Its reciprocal quantity is electrical conductance measured in siemens.

In EMS the current flow problem is addressed in the Electric Conduction analysis. The user has to decide before

running the study in which components the resistance is desired to be computed. EMS makes it convenient by creating a Resistance folder in the Manager tree for Electric Conduction studies. EMS adds an item in the Resistance folder for each resistance set you define on one or more entities.

A resistance is applied by the corresponding PropertyManager accessible by right-clicking the Resistance folder of a study in the EMS Manager tree, or by clicking EMS, Resistance .

NOTE: To help you define studies faster, you can drag and drop Resistance folders and items from one study to

another compatible study in the EMS Manager tree. You can also copy studies and other folders and items.

The following topics are discussed in this section:

Computing a Resistance

Page 200: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

186

Computing a Resistance

The Electric Conduction module computes the resistance. The resistance is defined as Voltage/Current. The voltage is defined between two points. Therefore, the user has to specify the entry and exit ports for the resistor set. The entry port is where the current flows into the resistor set and exit port is where the current exits. EMS automatically computes the voltage difference between the entry and exit ports as well as the current flowing through the resistor set. From the current and voltage, the resistance is deduced.

To define a resistance set:

1. In a Electric Conduction study, right-click the Resistance fold and select Define.

-or-

click Resistance on the EMS toolbar.

-or-

click EMS, Resistance

The Resistance PropertyManager appears.

2. Click inside the Components and Bodies for Resistance box then select the components and

bodies that make up the resistance set.

3. Click inside the Faces for Entry Port box then select the faces that make up the Entry Port.

4. Click inside the Faces for Exit Port box then select the faces that make up the Exit Port.

4. Click OK .

Resistance computation is available only for Electric Conduction analysis.

Page 201: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Resistance

187

Modifying a Resistance Set

To modify a resistance set:

1. In the EMS Manager tree, right-click the corresponding resistance set that you want to modify and select

Edit Definition.

The proper PropertyManager appears.

2. Make the desired changes.

3. Click OK .

Page 202: EMS_UserGuide.pdf
Page 203: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

189

Capacitance

Computing Capacitance Matrix

Capacitance is a measure of the amount of electric charge stored for a given electric potential between conductors. Capacitance exists between any two conductors insulated from one another. It is usually defined as the total electric charge placed on the object divided by the potential of the object: The MKS unit of capacitance is the farad (F). A capacitance of one farad results in a potential of one volt for one coulomb of charge. The capacitance of the majority of capacitors used in electronic circuits is several orders of magnitude smaller than the farad. The most common units of capacitance in use today are the microfarad (µF), the nanofarad (nF) and the picofarad (pF).

For N conductors system, the capacitance is a NxN matrix where Cii is called self capacitance and Cij is called mutual capacitance. A self capacitance is generally defined as the amount of electric charge necessary to increase its electrical potential by one volt. A mutual inductance is generally defined as the capacitance between two conductors when the effect of all other conductors is removed.

Since the capacitance is a matrix, the conductors in the model must be numbered consecutively. In EMS, we make use of the concept of Floating Conductor to number the conductors. Internally, EMS assigns a 1 volt on

each floating conductor. The 1 volt assigned is actually arbitrary because the capacitance does not depend on the applied voltage. However, the conductor number is important.

To compute the capacitance matrix in EMS:

Use the Electrostatic module.

Assign a Floating Conductor restrain to each conductor in the system.

Using the Fixed Voltage restraint, assign a zero volt to all grounded conductors.

The capacitance matrix is output to the Study Report and Results Table

Capacitance computation is available only for Electrostatic analysis.

Page 204: EMS_UserGuide.pdf
Page 205: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

191

Circuit Parameters

Computing Circuit Parameters

This process of generating an electrical current in a conductor by placing the conductor in a changing magnetic field is called electromagnetic induction or just induction. It is called induction because the current is said to be induced in the conductor by the magnetic field. When induction occurs in an electrical circuit and affects the flow of electricity it is called inductance, L. Self-inductance, or simply inductance is the property of a circuit whereby a change in current causes a change in voltage in the same circuit. When one circuit induces current flow in a second nearby circuit, it is known as mutual-inductance. Inductance is expressed in henrys.

The effect of inductance can be understood using a single loop of wire as an example. If a voltage is suddenly applied between the ends of the loop of wire, the current must change from zero to non-zero. However, a non-zero current induces a magnetic field by Ampere's law. This change in the magnetic field induces an emf that is in the opposite direction of the change in current. The strength of this emf is proportional to the change in current and the inductance. When these opposing forces are in balance, the result is a current that increases linearly with time where the rate of this change is determined by the applied voltage and the inductance.

For N coils system, the inductance is a NxN matrix where Lii is the self inductance and Lij is the mutual inductance. Therefore, the coils have to be numbered consecutively. Upon the user request, EMS computes the Circuit Parameters matrices for the Magnetic analyses. The computation of the circuit parameters necessitates additional computational time. Therefore, unless the user needs it, the circuit parameters should not be computed to save CPU time.

The product of the flux passing through a coil with the number of turns of that coil is called flux linkage ( =

N). The flux linkage gives an indication of how the magnetic flux generated by one turn of the coil is linked to

adjacent turns of the coil. This quantity is also equal to the product of the inductance with the current ( = LI). It is therefore also computed if the user chooses to compute circuit parameters.

Another important quantity which is also computed with the inductance is induced voltage in each coil. However, it is computed only for AC Magnetic analysis because it is equal to the time derivative of the flux linkage with

respect to time (V = d /dt).

To compute the inductance matrix, flux linkage, and the induced voltage in EMS:

Use the Magnetostatic, AC Magnetic, or Transient Magnetic.

Check Compute Circuit Parameters in the study property.

Starting from 1 assign consecutive numbers to each coil.

The inductance matrix, flux linkage, and the induced voltage and others quantities are output to the Study Report and Results Table.

The induced voltage is available only for AC Magnetic analysis.

Page 206: EMS_UserGuide.pdf
Page 207: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

193

Meshing

Background on Meshing

Finite Element Analysis (FEA) provides a reliable numerical technique for analyzing engineering designs. The

process starts with the creation of a geometric model. Then, the program subdivides the model into small pieces of

simple shapes (elements) connected at common points (nodes). Finite element analysis programs look at the

model as a network of discrete interconnected elements.

The Finite Element Method (FEM) predicts the behavior of the model by combining the information obtained from

all elements making up the model.

Meshing is a very crucial step in design analysis. The automatic mesher in EMS generates a mesh based on a

global element size, tolerance, and local mesh control specifications. Mesh control lets you specify different sizes

of elements for components and faces.

EMS estimates a global element size for the model taking into consideration its volume, surface area, and other

geometric details. The size of the generated mesh (number of nodes and elements) depends on the geometry and

dimensions of the model, element size, mesh tolerance, and mesh control. In the early stages of design analysis

where approximate results may suffice, you can specify a larger element size for a faster solution. For a more

accurate solution, a smaller element size may be required.

This section discusses the following topics:

Meshing Parameters

Meshing Options

Controlling the Mesh

Mesh Quality Checks

Meshing Failure Diagnostics

Meshing Tips

Page 208: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

194

Meshing Parameters

The mesh is generated by right clicking the Mesh icon in the EMS Manager tree and selecting Create. The generated mesh depends on the following factors:

Active mesh options

Mesh control specifications

Global element size and tolerance

NOTE: It is recommended that you verify all these factors before meshing. Any change in these factors requires remeshing. The Options button in the Mesh PropertyManager provides a convenient access to check meshing preferences. Right-click the Mesh icon and select Details to view how an existing mesh was generated.

Page 209: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Meshing

195

Rebuilding the Mesh

You can use one mesh for multiple studies to investigate the effect of using different materials, loads, and restraints. However, to consider the impact of geometry changes on the results, you must rebuild the mesh and rerun the study after making any change in geometry. The new mesh is used in subsequent runs. However, you can still view the old mesh and results associated with a study. If you rerun a study after rebuilding the mesh, the new mesh is used and all old results are overwritten.

To run a study using its old mesh:

1. Click the study icon in the EMS Manager tree.

The study becomes active.

2. Right-click the Mesh icon and select Show Mesh. 3. Right-click the Study icon and select Run.

Page 210: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

196

Automatic Looping

Automatic looping instructs the mesher to automatically retry to mesh the model using a smaller global element size. You control the maximum number of trials allowed and the ratio by which the global element size and tolerance are reduced each time.

To enable and set automatic looping options:

1. In the EMS Manager tree, right-click the Mesh icon and select Create.

The Mesh PropertyManager appears.

2. Click Options.

The Options dialog box appears with the Mesh tab selected.

3. Under Automatic looping, do the following: a. Check Enable automatic looping for solids. b. Set No. of loops, Global element size factor for each loop, and Tolerance factor for each

loop. 4. Click OK.

Page 211: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Meshing

197

Meshing Options

Meshing Options are essential factors in determining the quality of the mesh and hence the results. Results based on different preference settings should converge to each other if an adequately small element size is used.

Element Growth Rate is the maximum ratio between two neighboring elements. The default value is 1.4 which is adequate for most problems.

Accurate Curvature Representation option, when checked, the mesher follows accurately curved surfaces. The default value is 12 which the maximum angle between the normal to the surface and the normal to the mesh faces.

Automatic looping instructs the mesher to automatically retry to mesh the model using a smaller global element

size. You control the maximum number of trials allowed and the ratio by which the global element size and tolerance are reduced each time.

Setting the meshing Options

Page 212: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

198

Mesh

The Mesh PropertyManager allows you to mesh the model.

Mesh Parameters. Sets the global element size, tolerance, and options. o Slider bar. The slide bar lets you change the global element size and tolerance. The extreme left

position (Coarse) sets the global element size to twice the default size. The extreme right position (Fine) sets the global element size to half the default size.

o Global Size . Sets the global average element size. EMS suggests a default value based on

the model volume and surface area. The global element size is given in the default SolidWorks unit of length.

o Tolerance . Sets the tolerance value. The default tolerance is 5% of the global element size.

NOTE: Adjusting the tolerance can help resolve some meshing problems. For example, if meshing

fails due to free edges, increasing the tolerance can solve the problem. The tolerance cannot exceed 30% of the element size.

o Reset to default size. Resets the Global Size field to the default value suggested by the program.

Run analysis after meshing. If checked, EMS runs the study right after finishing the meshing of the

model successfully.

Options. Click this button to check or modify the active meshing options.

To mesh a model:

1. In the EMS Manager tree, right-click the Mesh icon and select Create.

The Mesh PropertyManager appears.

2. Under Mesh Parameters, set the Global Size and Tolerance values. 3. If you want to use the default element size, click Reset to default size. 4. To check the active meshing options, click Options.

The Options dialog box appears with the Mesh tab selected.

5. Check and modify the desired meshing options and click OK. 6. To instruct the program to run the study right after meshing the model, check Run analysis after

meshing. 7. Click OK.

Page 213: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Meshing

199

Controlling the Mesh

Mesh Control Parameters

Mesh control refers to specifying different element sizes at different regions in the model. A smaller element size in a region improves the accuracy of results in that region. You can specify mesh control at faces and components.

To access the Mesh Control PropertyManager, right-click the Mesh icon and select Apply Control.

Mesh Control Parameters

The only mesh control parameter is the element size for the specified entities.

To apply mesh control to mixed types of entities:

1. In the EMS Manager tree, right-click the Mesh icon and select Apply Mesh Control.

The Mesh Control PropertyManager appears.

2. Click inside the Components and Bodies for Mesh Control box then select the components and

bodies to which you want to apply a mesh control.

3. Click inside the Faces for Mesh Control box then select the face to which you want to apply a mesh

control.

4. Under Control Parameters, type a value in the Element Size box .

5. Click OK .

The transition between the dense and coarse mesh is overall controlled by the Element Growth Rate set at

the mesh options level. The default value is 1.4

Page 214: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

200

Mesh Control Parameters

Mesh control refers to specifying different element sizes at different regions in the model. A smaller element size in a region improves the accuracy of results in that region. You can specify mesh control at faces and components.

To access the Mesh Control PropertyManager, right-click the Mesh icon and select Apply Control.

Mesh Control Parameters

The only mesh control parameter is the element size for the specified entities.

To apply mesh control to mixed types of entities:

1. In the EMS Manager tree, right-click the Mesh icon and select Apply Mesh Control.

The Mesh Control PropertyManager appears.

2. Click inside the Components and Bodies for Mesh Control box then select the components and

bodies to which you want to apply a mesh control.

3. Click inside the Faces for Mesh Control box then select the face to which you want to apply a mesh

control.

4. Under Control Parameters, type a value in the Element Size box .

5. Click OK .

The transition between the dense and coarse mesh is overall controlled by the Element Growth Rate set at

the mesh options level. The default value is 1.4

Page 215: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Meshing

201

Mesh Control Examples

The following examples illustrate mesh control on various entities of a model.

Mesh control applied to faces

Mesh control applied to a component

Page 216: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

202

Failure Diagnostics

When meshing fails, EMS gives a message and stops unless the automatic mesh looping is active. A failure diagnostics tool is provided to help you locate and resolve solid meshing problems.

The meshing of a solid component consists of two basic phases. In the first phase, the mesher places nodes on the boundary. This phase is called surface meshing. If the first phase is successful, the mesher starts the second phase where it creates nodes in the inside, fills the volume with tetrahedral elements. Failure can occur during one of the two phases.

The Failure Diagnostics PropertyManager lists and highlights the components that failed. For each component, it

lists and highlights the faces and edges that caused the failure.

Failed Components . Lists all components that failed during meshing.

Failed Faces . Lists all faces that failed during meshing.

To identify failing components:

1. After meshing has failed, right-click the Mesh icon and select Failure Diagnostics. 2. To identify the problem with a component, select it in the list box.

All faces of the selected component that caused the meshing to fail highlight in the graphics area.

3. To identify a failing face, select it in the list box.

Selected face highlights in the graphics area.

Page 217: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Meshing

203

Meshing Tips

When you mesh a study, EMS meshes all unsuppressed solids.

For assemblies, check component interference. To detect interference in an assembly, click Tools, Interference Detection. Any interference should be fixed before meshing the model.

If meshing fails, use the Failure Diagnostics tool to locate the cause of mesh failure. Try the proposed

options to solve the problem. You can also try different element size, define mesh control, or activate Enable automatic looping for solids.

It is good practice to check mesh options before meshing. For example, an Element Growth Rate smaller than 1.25 or a Accurate Curvature Representation parameter less than 10 can result in

generating an unnecessarily large number of elements for models with many small features. The Automatic looping can help solve meshing problems automatically, but you can adjust its settings for a

particular model.

To improve results in important areas, use mesh control to set a smaller element size. When meshing an assembly with a wide range of component sizes, default meshing results in a relatively coarse mesh for small components. Component mesh control offers an easy way to give more importance to the selected small components. Use this option to identify important small components.

Page 218: EMS_UserGuide.pdf
Page 219: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

205

Viewing Results

Viewing Analysis Results

You view the results after running a study. In viewing the results, you can generate plots, lists, graphs, and reports depending on the study and result types. In this section, you learn about the following topics:

Plotting Results

Graphing Results

Manipulating Result Plots

You may also view the lumped quantities such as capacitance, inductance, force, and power in a tabulated format as follows:

1. In the EMS Manager tree, right-click on Report folder or click on tool bar.. 2. Select Results Table.

Page 220: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

206

Compare Studies Results

The Compare Studies Results option allows you to do the following:

Browse the results table of all studies of a given study type in the same window.

Generate a 2D graph of selected parameter results along all checked studies in the studies list

Export the checked studies results to a text file or an excel sheet.

You ca access the Compare Studies Results dialog by right clicking on the root item of EMS Manager tree, a menu pops-up, select Compare Studies Results, a sub menu pops-up, select the available type of studies you wish to

compare. A study type is available for comparison whenever you have two or more studies of that type with results. The Compare Studies dialog Popup.

For example, to view the results of Study 1 you select the Study 1 item in the Studies list .

To compare results of a given parameter by generating a 2D graph you do the following:

Check All / Uncheck All : Use this button to select or unselect all existents studies .

Add Parameter button : To compare results of a given parameter by generating a 2D graph you need to select a cell from one of the above grid results and click this button to add this parameter to the " Parameter (s) to plot "

list.

Plot button : Click this button to popup a 2D graph plot of the added parameter (s) for the checked (selected)

studies.

Page 221: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Viewing Results

207

Export button: Click this button to export results of checked studies to a text file or excel sheet.

Print button: Click this button to print the results of checked studies.

Page 222: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

208

Plotting Results

Plotting Results

EMS generates result folders in the EMS Manager tree automatically after running a study successfully. The names of the result folders depend on the study type. There are two type of plots available to all results folder.

3D Plots

Again, the finite element method meshes the model into many tetrahedral elements effectively replacing a complex problem by many simple problems that need to be solved simultaneously. Tetrahedral elements share common nodes and edges. Generally speaking, the user would be interested in uncovering the value of the unknown fields at the nodes since they represent the discretized space. A convenient way is to give a color map of the values at all the nodes in 3D space. This type of 3D plot is very popular in all finite element disciplines. EMS offers this type of plot for all field quantities that can have a distributed value at each node.

EMS automatically generates a 3D plot in each folder and can be displayed by double-clicking the icon in the Manager tree. Plots are displayed in a different window from the model geometry. You can toggle between the model and the results window by clicking on the corresponding tab at the lower left corner of the graphics area. To activate the model geometry window click on the Model tab. To activate the results window click on the Plot Results tab.

Since the model and the results are conveniently managed in two separate windows, each has its own View Toolbar. The model has the regular SolidWorks toolbar.

Whereas, the results have the following view toolbar:

When you click on he Model tab, the results toolbar is deactivated in order to avoid confusion between the two toolbars.

You can define plots by right-clicking a result folder in the EMS Manager tree and selecting 3D.

EMS generates the following result plots:

Electric Potential Plot

Electric Field Plot

Electric Displacement Plot

Current Density Plot

Magnetic Flux Density Plot

Magnetic Field Plot

Applied Current Density Plot

Current Density Plot

Force Density Plot

Losses Density Plot

Compute Flux

Compute Voltage

Temperature

Page 223: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Viewing Results

209

Temperature Gradient

Heat Flux

2D Plots

3D plots are instructive. However, they may not show the exact value at a particular location in the model. For some applications, knowing the exact value of the field at such location is crucial to the design. Thus the need for a 2D type of plot that gives the exact numerical value instead of a just a color map. EMS has two ways of producing this type of plot:

Graphing of Probed Results Plots

Graphing Results on a Line Segment

Page 224: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

210

Electric Potential Plot

The Electric Potential Plot PropertyManager allows you to plot electric potential or the voltage results for

Electrostatic and Electric Conduction studies. You can access the Electric Potential Plot PropertyManager after

a successful run of your study. Since the electric potential is a scalar, they are no components to choose from nor

is there a vector plot type. That is, the only fringe plot type is available.

Display

Select Units . Select the units of the electric potential plot.

Plot Motion Time Step Sets the motion step number at which the selected result is to be plotted.

Available only if motion analysis option is checked

o Time . Displays the time corresponding to the selected plot step.

Fringe Options. Sets the display of the active fringe plot.

o Point. Uses colored point contours. o Line. Uses colored line contours. o Discrete. Uses color-filled contours with discrete shading. o Continuous. Uses color-filled contours with smooth shading.

The electric potential plot is available only for Electrostatic and Electric Conduction analyses.

Page 225: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Viewing Results

211

Electric Field Plot

The Electric Field Plot PropertyManager allows you to plot electric field results for Electrostatic ,Electric

Conduction , Magnetostatic and AC Magnetic studies. You can access the Electric Field Plot PropertyManager

after a successful run of your study.

Display

Select Component Type . Select an electric field component to plot. Directions are based on the global

coordinate system. o Ex: Electric Field in the X direction o Ey: Electric Field in the Y direction o Ez: Electric Field in the Z direction o Er: Resultant Electric Field

Select Units . Select the units of the electric field plot.

Plot Type . o Fringe. Generates a fringe plot. You can control the display of the fringe plot using the Fringe

Options. Available for all electric field components. o Vector. Generates a vector plot where a vector is plotted at each node to show the magnitude

and direction of the resultant electric field vector. You can control the size and density of the vectors in a vector plot using the Vector Plot Options PropertyManager.

Plot Motion Time Step Sets the motion step number at which the selected result is to be plotted.

Available only if motion analysis option is checked.

Time . Displays the motion time corresponding to the selected plot motion time step.

Fringe Options. Sets the display of the active fringe plot. o Continuous. Uses color-filled contours with smooth shading. o Discrete. Uses color-filled contours with discrete shading. o Lines. Uses colored line contours. o Points. Uses colored point contours.

In case of Magnetostatic and AC Magnetic studies the following extra properties will be displayed:

Part

o Real o Imaginary o Magnitude

Phase: Enter the Omega T angle value in degree.

The electric field plot is available only for Electrostatic, Electric Conduction, Magnetostatic and AC Magnetic analyses.

Page 226: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

212

Electric Displacement Plot

The Electric Displacement (D) Plot PropertyManager allows you to plot electric field results for Electrostatic

studies. You can access the Electric Displacement Plot PropertyManager after a successful run of your study.

Display

Select Component Type . Select an electric displacement component to plot. Directions are based on

the global coordinate system. o Dx: Electric Displacement in the X direction o Dy: Electric Displacement in the Y direction o Dz: Electric Displacement in the Z direction o Dr: Resultant Electric Displacement

Select Units . Select the units of the electric displacement plot.

Plot Motion Time Step Sets the motion step number at which the selected result is to be plotted.

Available only if motion analysis option is checked

o Time . Displays the time corresponding to the selected plot step.

Plot Type . o Fringe. Generates a fringe plot. You can control the display of the fringe plot using the Fringe

Options. Available for all electric displacement components. o Vector. Generates a vector plot where a vector is plotted at each node to show the magnitude

and direction of the resultant electric displacement vector. You can control the size and density of the vectors in a vector plot using the Vector Plot Options PropertyManager.

Fringe Options. Sets the display of the active fringe plot.

o Continuous. Uses color-filled contours with smooth shading. o Discrete. Uses color-filled contours with discrete shading. o Lines. Uses colored line contours. o Points. Uses colored point contours.

The electric displacement plot is available only for Electrostatic analyses.

Page 227: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Viewing Results

213

Current Density Plot

The Current Density Plot PropertyManager allows you to plot current density results for Electric Conduction

studies. You can access the Current Density Plot PropertyManager after a successful run of your study.

Display

Select Component Type . Select an current density component to plot. Directions are based on the

global coordinate system. o Jx: Current Density in the X direction o Jy: Current Density in the Y direction o Jz: Current Density in the Z direction o Jr: Resultant Current Density

Select Units . Select the units of the current density plot.

Plot Type . o Fringe. Generates a fringe plot. You can control the display of the fringe plot using the Fringe

Options. Available for all current density components. o Vector. Generates a vector plot where a vector is plotted at each node to show the magnitude

and direction of the resultant current density vector. You can control the size and density of the vectors in a vector plot using the Vector Plot Options PropertyManager.

Plot Motion Time Step Sets the motion step number at which the selected result is to be plotted.

Available only if motion analysis option is checked.

Time . Displays the motion time corresponding to the selected plot motion time step.

Fringe Options. Sets the display of the active fringe plot. o Continuous. Uses color-filled contours with smooth shading. o Discrete. Uses color-filled contours with discrete shading. o Lines. Uses colored line contours. o Points. Uses colored point contours.

The electric field plot is available only for Electric Conduction analyses.

Page 228: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

214

Magnetic Flux Density Plot

The Magnetic Flux Density (B) Plot PropertyManager allows you to plot magnetic flux density results for

Magnetostatic, AC Magnetic, and Transient Magnetic studies. You can access the Magnetic Flux Density Plot

PropertyManager after a successful run of your study.

Display

Select Component Type . Select an magnetic flux density component to plot. Directions are based on

the global coordinate system. o Bx: Magnetic Flux Density in the X direction o By: Magnetic Flux Density in the Y direction o Bz: Magnetic Flux Density in the Z direction o Br: Resultant Magnetic Flux Density

Select Units . Select the units of the magnetic density flux plot.

Plot Type . o Fringe. Generates a fringe plot. You can control the display of the fringe plot using the Fringe

Options. Available for all magnetic flux density components. o Vector. Generates a vector plot where a vector is plotted at each node to show the magnitude

and direction of the resultant magnetic flux density vector. You can control the size and density of the vectors in a vector plot using the Vector Plot Options PropertyManager.

Fringe Options. Sets the display of the active fringe plot. o Continuous. Uses color-filled contours with smooth shading. o Discrete. Uses color-filled contours with discrete shading. o Lines. Uses colored line contours. o Points. Uses colored point contours.

Plot Step Sets the step number (or motion time step) at which the selected result is to be plotted.

Available only for transient magnetic studies or if motion analysis option is checked.

o Time . Displays the time corresponding to the selected plot step.

Part. Sets witch part of values is to be plotted.

o Real o Imaginary o Magnitude

Phase: Enter the Omega T angle value in degree.

The magnetic flux density plot is available for Magnetostatic, AC Magnetic, and Transient Magnetic analyses.

Page 229: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Viewing Results

215

Magnetic Field Plot

The Magnetic Field (H) Plot PropertyManager allows you to plot magnetic field results for Magnetostatic, AC

Magnetic, and Transient Magnetic studies. You can access the Magnetic Field Plot PropertyManager after a

successful run of your study.

Display

Select Component Type. Select an magnetic field component to plot. Directions are based on the global

coordinate system. o Hx: Magnetic Field in the X direction o Hy: Magnetic Field in the Y direction o Hz: Magnetic Field in the Z direction o Hr: Resultant Magnetic Field

Select Units . Select the units of the magnetic field plot.

Plot Type. o Fringe. Generates a fringe plot. You can control the display of the fringe plot using the Fringe

Options. Available for all magnetic field components. o Vector. Generates a vector plot where a vector is plotted at each node to show the magnitude

and direction of the resultant magnetic field vector. You can control the size and density of the vectors in a vector plot using the Vector Plot Options PropertyManager.

Fringe Options. Sets the display of the active fringe plot. o Continuous. Uses color-filled contours with smooth shading. o Discrete. Uses color-filled contours with discrete shading. o Lines. Uses colored line contours. o Points. Uses colored point contours.

Plot Step Sets the step number (or motion time step) at which the selected result is to be plotted.

Available only for transient magnetic studies or if motion analysis option is checked.

Time . Displays the time corresponding to the selected plot step.

Part. Sets witch part of values is to be plotted.

o Real o Imaginary o Magnitude

Phase: Enter the Omega T angle value in degree .Available only for AC Magnetic studies.

The magnetic field plot is available for Magnetostatic, AC Magnetic, and Transient Magnetic analyses.

Page 230: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

216

Applied Current Density Plot

The Applied Current Density (Ja) Plot PropertyManager allows you to plot applied current density results for

Magnetostatic, AC Magnetic, and Transient Magnetic studies. You can access the Applied Current Density Plot

PropertyManager after a successful run of your study. This type of plot is available only if the model has at least

one coil.

Display

Select Component Type. Select an applied current density component to plot. Directions are based on

the global coordinate system. o Jax: Applied Current Density in the X direction o Jay: Applied Current Density in the Y direction o Jaz: Applied Current Density in the Z direction o Jar: Resultant Applied Current Density

Select Units . Select the units of the applied current density plot.

Plot Type. o Fringe. Generates a fringe plot. You can control the display of the fringe plot using the Fringe

Options. Available for all applied current density components. o Vector. Generates a vector plot where a vector is plotted at each node to show the magnitude

and direction of the resultant applied current density vector. You can control the size and density of the vectors in a vector plot using the Vector Plot Options PropertyManager.

Fringe Options. Sets the display of the active fringe plot. o Continuous. Uses color-filled contours with smooth shading. o Discrete. Uses color-filled contours with discrete shading. o Lines. Uses colored line contours. o Points. Uses colored point contours.

Plot Step Sets the step number (or motion time step) at which the selected result is to be plotted.

Available only for transient magnetic studies or if motion analysis option is checked.

Time . Displays the time corresponding to the selected plot step.

Part. Sets witch part of values is to be plotted.

o Real o Imaginary o Magnitude

Phase: Enter the Omega T angle value in degree.

The applied current density plot is available for Magnetostatic, AC Magnetic, and Transient Magnetic

analyses. The model must have at least one coil.

Page 231: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Viewing Results

217

Current Density Plot

Note: The Current Density (Je) use to be called in all previous EMS versions Eddy Current Density (Je) .

The Current Density (Je) PropertyManager allows you to plot current density results for AC Magnetic and

Transient Magnetic studies. You can access the Current Density Plot PropertyManager after a successful run of

your study.

Display

Select Component Type. Select an current density component to plot. Directions are based on the

global coordinate system. o Jex: Current Density in the X direction o Jey: Current Density in the Y direction o Jez: Current Density in the Z direction o Jer: Resultant Current Density

Select Units . Select the units of the current density plot.

Plot Type. o Fringe. Generates a fringe plot. You can control the display of the fringe plot using the Fringe

Options. Available for all current density components. o Vector. Generates a vector plot where a vector is plotted at each node to show the magnitude

and direction of the resultant current density vector. You can control the size and density of the vectors in a vector plot using the Vector Plot Options PropertyManager.

Fringe Options. Sets the display of the active fringe plot. o Continuous. Uses color-filled contours with smooth shading. o Discrete. Uses color-filled contours with discrete shading. o Lines. Uses colored line contours. o Points. Uses colored point contours.

Plot Step Sets the step number (or motion time step) at which the selected result is to be plotted.

Available only for transient magnetic studies or if motion analysis option is checked.

o Time . Displays the time corresponding to the selected plot step.

Part. Sets witch part of values is to be plotted.

o Real o Imaginary o Magnitude

Phase: Enter the Omega T angle value in degree.

The current density plot is available for AC Magnetic and Transient Magnetic analyses.

Page 232: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

218

Force Density Plot

Note: Force Density ( F) used to be called Force Distribution (F) in all previous EMS versions.

The Force Density (F) Plot PropertyManager allows you to plot force density results for Electrostatic,

Magnetostatic, AC Magnetic, and Transient Magnetic studies. You can access the Force Density Plot

PropertyManager after a successful run of your study.

Display

Select Component Type. Select an force density component to plot. Directions are based on the global

coordinate system. o Fx: Force in the X direction o Fy: Force in the Y direction o Fz: Force in the Z direction o Fr: Resultant Force

Select Units . Select the units of the force plot.

Plot Type. o Fringe. Generates a fringe plot. You can control the display of the fringe plot using the Fringe

Options. Available for all force components. o Vector. Generates a vector plot where a vector is plotted at each node to show the magnitude

and direction of the resultant force vector. You can control the size and density of the vectors in a vector plot using the Vector Plot Options PropertyManager.

Force Type . Select either virtual work or Lorentz force type. For Electrostatic analysis, only the virtual

work method is available.

Fringe Options. Sets the display of the active fringe plot. o Continuous. Uses color-filled contours with smooth shading. o Discrete. Uses color-filled contours with discrete shading. o Lines. Uses colored line contours. o Points. Uses colored point contours.

Plot Step Sets the step number (or motion time step) at which the selected result is to be plotted.

Available only for transient magnetic studies or if motion analysis option is checked.

o Time . Displays the time corresponding to the selected plot step.

The force plot is available for Electrostatic, Magnetostatic, AC Magnetic, and Transient Magnetic analyses. In other words, it is not available only for Electric Conduction analysis.

Page 233: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Viewing Results

219

Losses Density Plot

The Losses Density plot PropertyManager allows you to plot loss density results for AC Magnetic studies when

the Split Core Loss option is checked. You can access the Losses Density Plot PropertyManager after a successful

run of your study.

Display

Select Loss Type. Select an Losses density type to plot.

o Ohmic Loss o Eddy Loss o Hysterisis Loss o Excess Loss o Core Loss

Select Units . Select the units of the loss plot.

Fringe Options. Sets the display of the active fringe plot. o Continuous. Uses color-filled contours with smooth shading. o Discrete. Uses color-filled contours with discrete shading. o Lines. Uses colored line contours. o Points. Uses colored point contours.

Plot Step Sets the step number (or motion time step) at which the selected result is to be plotted.

Available only for transient magnetic studies or if motion analysis option is checked.

Time . Displays the time corresponding to the selected plot step.

The Loss plot is available for AC Magnetic analyses only and the Split Core Loss option must be checked.

Page 234: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

220

Compute Flux

The Compute Flux PropertyManager allows you to compute the flux results on selected faces for Magnetostatic, AC Magnetic and Transient Magnetic studies. You can access the Compute flux PropertyManager after a successful run of your study.

Display

1. Click inside the Faces box then select the face to which you want to compute the Flux. 2. Phase: Enter the Omega T angle value in degree .Available only for AC Magnetic studies. 3. Plot Step Sets the step number (or motion time step) at which the selected result is to be plotted.

Available only for transient magnetic studies or if motion analysis option is checked.

4. Time . Displays the time corresponding to the selected plot step. 5. Click the Compute button to compute the flux on the selected face (s).

the results will be displayed in the edit box under the Compute button

The compute flux is available for Magnetostatic, AC Magnetic, and Transient Magnetic analyses.

Page 235: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Viewing Results

221

Compute Voltage

The Compute Voltage PropertyManager allows you to compute the voltage results on selected faces for AC Magnetic studies. You can access the Compute voltage PropertyManager after a successful run of your study.

Display

1. Enter the coordinates of two points that define a line for which you want to compute voltage. You can click on import button to load solidworks defined reference points.

2. Phase: Enter the Omega T angle value in degree .Available only for AC Magnetic studies. 3. Plot Step Sets the step number (or motion time step) at which the selected result is to be computed.

Available only for transient magnetic studies or if motion analysis option is checked.

4. Time . Displays the time corresponding to the selected plot step.

5. Select Units . Select the units of the voltage. 6. Click the Compute button to compute the voltage on the selected two points that define a line.

the results will be displayed in the edit box under the Compute button

The compute voltage is available only for AC Magnetic analyses.

Page 236: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

222

Thermal Plotting Results

Temperature

The Temperature Plot PropertyManager allows you to plot the temperature results for Electrostatic, Electric

Conduction, Magnetostatic and AC Magnetic studies. You can access the Temperature Plot PropertyManager

after a successful run of your study with thermal solution options on. Since the temperature is a scalar, they are no

components to choose from nor is there a vector plot type. That is, the only fringe plot type is available.

Display

Select Units . Select the units of the Temperature plot.

Plot Step Sets the step number (or motion time step) at which the selected result is to be plotted.

Available only for transient magnetic studies or if motion analysis option is checked.

o Time . Displays the time corresponding to the selected plot step.

Fringe Options. Sets the display of the active fringe plot. o Continuous. Uses color-filled contours with smooth shading. o Discrete. Uses color-filled contours with discrete shading. o Lines. Uses colored line contours. o Points. Uses colored point contours.

The Temperature plot is available only for Electric Conduction, Magnetostatic , AC Magnetic and Transient Magnetic analyses.

Page 237: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Viewing Results

223

Temperature Gradient

The Temperature Gradient Plot PropertyManager allows you to plot the temperature gradient results for

Electrostatic, Electric Conduction, Magnetostatic and AC Magnetic studies. You can access the Temperature

Gradient Plot PropertyManager after a successful run of your study with thermal solution options on.

Display

Select Component Type . Select an Temperature Gradient components to plot. Directions are based on

the global coordinate system. o TGx: Temperature Gradient in the X direction o TGy: Temperature Gradient in the Y direction o TGz: Temperature Gradient in the Z direction o TGr: Resultant Temperature Gradient

Select Units . Select the units of the Temperature Gradient plot.

Plot Type . o Fringe. Generates a fringe plot. You can control the display of the fringe plot using the Fringe

Options. Available for all Temperature Gradient components. o Vector. Generates a vector plot where a vector is plotted at each node to show the magnitude

and direction of the resultant Temperature Gradient vector. You can control the size and density of the vectors in a vector plot using the Vector Plot Options PropertyManager.

Plot Step Sets the step number (or motion time step) at which the selected result is to be plotted.

Available only for transient magnetic studies or if motion analysis option is checked.

o Time . Displays the time corresponding to the selected plot step.

Fringe Options. Sets the display of the active fringe plot. o Continuous. Uses color-filled contours with smooth shading. o Discrete. Uses color-filled contours with discrete shading. o Lines. Uses colored line contours. o Points. Uses colored point contours.

The Temperature Gradient plot is available only for Electric Conduction, Magnetostatic , AC Magnetic and Transient Magnetic analyses.

Page 238: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

224

Heat Flux

The Heat Flux Plot PropertyManager allows you to plot the heat flux results for Electrostatic, Electric

Conduction, Magnetostatic and AC Magnetic studies. You can access the Heat Flux Plot PropertyManager after

a successful run of your study with thermal solution options on.

Display

Select Component Type . Select an Heat Flux components to plot. Directions are based on the global

coordinate system. o FLx: Heat Flux in the X direction o FLy: Heat Flux in the Y direction o FLz: Heat Flux in the Z direction o FLr: Resultant Heat Flux

Select Units . Select the units of the Heat Flux plot.

Plot Step Sets the step number (or motion time step) at which the selected result is to be plotted.

Available only for transient magnetic studies or if motion analysis option is checked.

o Time . Displays the time corresponding to the selected plot step.

Plot Type . o Fringe. Generates a fringe plot. You can control the display of the fringe plot using the Fringe

Options. Available for all Heat Flux components. o Vector. Generates a vector plot where a vector is plotted at each node to show the magnitude

and direction of the resultant Heat Flux vector. You can control the size and density of the vectors in a vector plot using the Vector Plot Options PropertyManager.

Fringe Options. Sets the display of the active fringe plot.

o Continuous. Uses color-filled contours with smooth shading. o Discrete. Uses color-filled contours with discrete shading. o Lines. Uses colored line contours. o Points. Uses colored point contours.

The Heat Flux plot is available only for Electric Conduction, Magnetostatic , AC Magnetic and Transient Magnetic analyses.

Page 239: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Viewing Results

225

Summary of Plots

EMS outputs different quantities depending on the analysis type. Some users may not identify which analysis that should be used only after they know the type of results and plots. The table below gives a summary for available plots available for each type of analysis.

ANALYSIS TYPE AVAILABLE PLOTS REMARKS

Electrostatic

Electric Potential

Electric Field

Electric Displacement

Force Density Only fringe plot is

available for electric potential plot since it is a scalar.

Applied current density plot is available only if the model has at least one coil.

The Lorentz force type is not available for electrostatic analysis.

For transient magnetic analysis, a time must be chosen for each plot type.

A wound coil does not have any eddy current despite its conductivity.

To have an eddy current, a component must have a nonzero conductivity.

Force plot is not available for the electric conduction analysis.

If thermal solution is on Temperature, Temperature Gradient and Heat Flux plot will

be available where is applicable.

Electric Conduction

Electric Potential

Electric Field

Current Density

Magnetostatic

Applied Current Density

Magnetic Flux Density

Magnetic Field Intensity

Force Density

Electric Field

Flux

AC Magnetic

Magnetic Flux Density

Magnetic Field Intensity

Applied Current Density

Current Density

Force Density

Electric Field

Losses Density

Flux

Voltage

Transient Magnetic

Magnetic Flux Density

Magnetic Field Intensity

Applied Current Density

Current Density

Force Density

Flux

Page 240: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

226

Graphing Results

Graphing Results

EMS has two ways of producing 2D graphs of the results.

Graphing of Probed Results Plots

Graphing Results on a Line Segment

Page 241: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Viewing Results

227

Graphing of Probed Result Plots

After using the Probe tool to identify the plotted result at the desired locations, you can graph the results. You can

use this functionality with any plot.

To generate a graph for the probed result plot:

1. Plot the desired result. 2. In the EMS Manager tree, right-click the plot icon and select Probe.

The Probe dialog box opens.

3. In the graphics area, click the desired locations.

The locations are highlighted in the graphics area as you click, and the nodes closest to these locations are listed in the dialog box.

4. Click Plot.

Below are some features of the Probing plot.

To see the listing of the force click on the Listing tab.

The distance D plotted on x-axis is from the starting of the segment.

To change the plot's properties, double click on the plot or click on the properties button .

To turn the markers on, click on the marker button .

To track the values on the curve, click on the drag button and drag the pointer on the curve.

To save the plot click on File->Save As and choose the desired format.

To copy the plot make sure that the 2D Plot tab is active and click on Edit->Copy.

To export the data to a text file or an Excel sheet, activate the Listing tab and click on Edit->Copy.

Page 242: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

228

Graphing Results on a Line Segment

Graphing probed results picks only mesh nodes. Graphing results on a line segment is more general because it

allows for precisely selecting any 2 points in the model that define a line. In addition, the line segment may be discretized to any number of points between the endpoints of the line. This functionality may be used with any plot type.

To generate a graph on a line segment:

1. Insert two points using the SolidWorks command: Insert->Reference Geometry->Point. 2. Right-clicking a result folder in the EMS Manager tree and select 2D.

3. From the drop-down list, choose the component of the field. 4. Select the end points of the line segment. 5. Choose the number of points on the segment. 6. Compare with (optional): this feature enable you to compare your defined segment plot of the active

study with other studies from the same study type by selecting the extra curve study source. Maximum number of extra curves to compare with is three.

7. Click OK .

Below are some features of the 2D plot.

To see the listing of the force click on the Listing tab.

The distance D plotted on x-axis is from the starting of the segment.

To change the plot's properties, double click on the plot or click on the properties button .

To turn the markers on, click on the marker button .

To track the values on the curve, click on the drag button and drag the pointer on the curve.

To save the plot click on File->Save As and choose the desired format.

To copy the plot make sure that the 2D Plot tab is active and click on Edit->Copy.

To export the data to a text file or an Excel sheet, activate the Listing tab and click on Edit->Copy.

Page 243: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Viewing Results

229

Manipulating Result Plots

Processing Result Plots

In this section you learn how to process results plots including::

Editing an Active Plot

Changing the Chart Options of a Plot

Section Clipping

Iso Clipping

Animate plot

Probing a Plot

Spline Probing

Plot Listing

Printing a Plot

Saving a Plot

Renaming a Plot

Deleting a Plot

Copying a Plot

Page 244: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

230

Editing a Result Plot

After generating a plot for the desired result, you may need to change one or more display options of the plot.

To edit an active plot:

1. In the EMS Manager tree, right-click the plot icon and select Edit Definition.

The PropertyManager of the plot appears.

2. Make the desired changes and click OK .

Page 245: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Viewing Results

231

Section

The Section PropertyManager allows you to create section views for the displayed result defining a cut. You may

view the inside or outside of the cut. You may define up to six sections on the same plot.

To define a section view for the active plot:

1. Right-click the active plot icon and select Section Clipping.

The Section PropertyManager opens and the dialogues for Section 1 appear.

2. Reference Plane. Select the plane to be used as a reference for the clipping section 1. You may select

one of the following button options:

o Front plane section button

o Top plane section button

o Right plane section button

3. Distance. Sets the distance between the reference plane (origin of the model ) and the clipping section

( reference point). Reference Point is represented by a sphere and an arrow the reference

point can be dragged by mouse to any position within the clipping section.

4. X-Orientation . Rotates the clipping section around the X-axis. Available when Front or Top Reference

Plane is selected.

5. Y-Orientation . Rotates the clipping section around the Y-axis. Available when Front or Right Reference

Plane is selected.

6. Z-Orientation . Rotates the clipping section around the Z-axis. Available when Top or Right Reference

Plane is selected.

7. Section Value Range: Set range of values of the section 1 to be created by setting the start range value

and the end range value. Note: The section range values must be within the plot color chart range values. 8. Plot on section only. Displays the result contours on the selected section only. Available only for

Section 1 9. Inside Out. if checked, shows the clipped data in the range of section value to the maximum plot value.

Available only for Section 1

10. If you wish to define more sections, repeat the steps 2..7 for each selected section ( up to a maximum of 6 section).

11. Click OK .

Options

Boundaries . Sets the display of the model boundary (None, Mesh or 3D Mesh)

Wireframe: Show/Hide model frame check box.

Model Origin: Show/Hide model origin check box.

Section Plane Center: Show/Hide section plane center check box.

All section planes frame: Show/Hide All section planes frame check box.

Clipping on/off . Sets the clipping of the active plot on/off.

Reset. Resets the selections to the default values.

Page 246: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

232

Section 3

This section appears after you select Section 2. Use Section 2 and Section 3 to create additional section views in the model.

NOTE: Section 3 is unavailable until Section 2 is selected.

Page 247: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Viewing Results

233

Iso Clipping

The Iso Clipping PropertyManager allows you to view surfaces of a specified value of the plotted result. You can

create up to six surfaces simultaneously.

To define an Iso clipping view for the active plot:

1. Right-click the active plot icon and select Iso Clipping.

The Iso Clipping PropertyManager opens and the dialogues for Iso Clipping 1 appear.

2. Iso Value. Sets the value of iso surface to be plotted. 3. Plot on section only. Displays the result contours on the selected section only. Available only for Iso 1 4. Inside Out. if checked, shows the clipped data in the range of section value to the maximum plot

value. Available only for Iso 1

5. If you wish to define more Iso Clipping, repeat the following steps for each selected Iso Clipping ( up to a maximum of 6 Iso Clipping).

Iso Value. Sets the value of iso surface to be plotted.

Multilayers check box: Check this box if you wish to have spaced equally values between the

specified clipping Value Range. o Iso Clipping Value Range: Set range of values of the Iso 2 to be created by setting the

start range value and the end range value. Note: The section range values must be

within the plot color chart range values.

o Number of Layers: Enter the number of layers

2. Click OK .

Options

Boundaries . Sets the display of the model boundary (None, Mesh or 3D Mesh)

Wireframe: Show/Hide model frame check box.

Clipping on/off . Sets the clipping of the active plot on/off.

Reset. Resets the selections to the default values.

Iso3

This Iso appears after you select Iso 2. Use Iso 2 and Iso 3 to create additional section views in the model.

NOTE: Section 3 is unavailable until Section 2 is selected.

Page 248: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

234

Animate 3D Plots

The Animate PropertyManager allows you to animate the current active 3D plot. Animation will be available in the

following cases:

1- All analysis where the motion option is turned on. The animation will be a display of the active plot in each

motion time step.

2- In transient analysis. The animation will be a display of the active plot in each transient time step, if the motion

option is turned on the transient time step will be the motion time step.

3- AC Magnetic analysis. The animation will be base on a display of the active plot for each omegaT phase . if the

motion option is turned on, the animation will be a display of the active plot in each motion time step.

To Animate the active plot:

1. Right-click the active plot icon and select Animate.

2. Click the play button to start animation with the default settings. You also have a pause and a stop button

to control the display of animation. 3. If you wish to save the animation in a video (*.avi) file, expand the Play to file... group and click the save

As button to save the animation with the defaults settings into a file. You may select the frame rate and number of loops of the animation process.

Page 249: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Viewing Results

235

3D Plot Listing

In many cases, you may want to know the numerical values of the plotted field . The listing functionality lets you view and export the plotted field values to an excel sheet or text file.

To view the plot listing:

1. In the EMS Manager tree, double-click the desired plot icon. 2. Right-click the plot icon and select Listing menu item. The listing PropertyManager opens.

3. To export listing click on SaveAs button to save the listed values as an Microsoft Excel Sheet (*.xls) or as a Text File (*.txt).

4. Click OK .

Page 250: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

236

Chart Options

Use the Chart Options PropertyManager to set the parameters that control the look of the legend in the active plot. To access the Chart Options PropertyManager, right-click the active plot icon and select Chart Options.

Display Options

Show min annotation. Turns the display of the annotation of the minimum value of the plot on/off.

Show max annotation. Turns the display of the annotation of the maximum value of the plot on/off.

Display plot details. If checked, displays the model name, study name, plot type, and the deformation

scale of a plot.

Show legend. Turns the display of the plot legend on/off.

Show Min/Max range on shown parts only. When checked, the program displays the minimum and the

maximum values of the plot only on the shown parts.

o Automatic. If checked, picks the minimum (Min) and the maximum (Max) values of the

chart automatically.

o Defined. If checked, you specify the minimum (Min) and the maximum (Max) values

of the chart.

Position/Format

Predefined positions. Sets the position of the chart to a predefined position.

Horizontal from left . Specify the horizontal distance from the left of the SolidWorks window as a

percentage of the width of the window.

Vertical from top . Specify the vertical distance from the top of the SolidWorks window as a

percentage of the height of the window.

Width . Controls the thickness of the chart. Available options are: Thick, Normal, and Thin.

Number format . Controls the display of the numeric values in the chart. Available formats are: Scientific (e), floating (f), and general (g).

No. of decimal places . Sets the number of decimal places to be displayed in the chart. You can

specify up to 8 decimal places to be displayed in a chart.

Color Options

Default . Uses the default color map in the plot.

Rainbow . Uses the rainbow color map in the plot.

Gray Scale . Sets the gray scale gradient map. Use this option for black and

white printers.

No. of chart colors . Sets the number of the colors used in the chart (2 to 24).

Flip. Reverses the color mapping.

Page 251: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Viewing Results

237

To apply a predefined color map...

1. In the EMS Manager tree, right-click the desired plot icon and select Chart Options.

The Chart Options PropertyManager appears.

2. Under Legend Options, click to check Display legend. 3. Under Chart Options, set the location of the legend and the numeric format. 4. Under Color Options, select Default, Rainbow, or Gray Scale. 5. If desired, click Flip to reverse the order of colors in the select color map. 6. Use the spin arrows to change the No. of Colors in the color map.

7. Click OK .

To plot a result on the shown parts only...

1. After running the study, display the desired result on the full model. 2. Hide the components that you want be hidden from the FeatureManager design tree. 3. Switch back to the EMS Manager tree and display the result again by double-clicking on the plot icon. 4. Right-click the plot icon and select Chart Options.

The Chart Options PropertyManager appears.

5. Click to check Show Min/Max range on shown parts only. 6. Click OK .

Page 252: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

238

Printing Result Plots

To print a result plot:

1. In the EMS Manager, right-click the Plot you want to print and select Print.

2. Click OK to send the plot in the SolidWorks window directly to the printer.

1.

The plot in the SolidWorks window is scaled to the paper size and then sent to the printer. It is recommended that you increase the size of the SolidWorks window to adjust the size of the chart labels/plot.

Page 253: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Viewing Results

239

Saving Result Plots

EMS allows you to save result plots in different formats.

To save an active plot:

1. In the EMS Manager tree, right-click the active plot icon and select Save As.

The Save As dialog box opens.

2. Specify the destination of the plot file. 3. Specify a name for the plot file. 4. Select one of the following formats:

Bitmap Files (*.bmp)

JPEG Files (*.jpg)

Image Files (*.gif)

5. Click Save.

To save all fringe plot in a study:

In the EMS Manager tree, right-click the study's icon and select Save all plots as JPEG files.

The files are saved in the folder specified in the Result Options for reports.

Page 254: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

240

Renaming Plot

To rename a result plot:

1. In the EMS Manager tree, right-click the plot icon that you want to rename and select Rename.

Enter the new name

2. Click Enter.

The selected plot is renamed.

Page 255: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Viewing Results

241

Deleting a Result Plot

To delete a result plot:

1. In the EMS Manager tree, right-click the plot icon that you want to delete and select Delete.

A confirmation message pops up.

2. Click Yes.

The selected plot is deleted.

Page 256: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

242

Copying a Result Plot Between Studies

EMS allows you to copy result plots between studies of the same type.

To copy a plot between to studies of the same type:

1. In the EMS Manager tree, activate the plot that you want to copy by double-clicking on its icon in the source study.

2. Right-click the plot icon and select Copy. 3. In the destination study, right-click the result folder of the same type and select Paste.

The icon of the new plot appears with the same name as the source plot with the Copy[1] prefix.

Page 257: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Viewing Results

243

Adding a Plot Title

You can add a title to a plot using the plot's PropertyManager.

To add a title to a plot:

1. In the EMS Manager tree, right-click the plot icon and select Edit Definition.

The plot PropertyManager appears.

2. Under Property, type the desired title in the appropriate box. 3. Click OK.

Page 258: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

244

Annotating Extreme Values on a Plot

You can annotate locations of extreme values in result plots. The program shows the numerical values and creates leaders to the corresponding locations automatically.

To show extreme value annotations on plots:

1. Right-click the active plot icon and select Chart Options.

2. Click the Plot tab. 3. Under Display Options, check the Show min annotation and Show max annotation check boxes. 4. Click OK.

Page 259: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Viewing Results

245

Customizing Plot Legend

The Plot tab in the Options dialog box enables you to set the chart relative position, width of color bar, number

format, number of decimals, and background color. The selected settings become the defaults for subsequent plots.

To customize the result legend:

1. Click EMS, Options.

The Options dialog box appears.

2. Click the Plot tab. 3. In the Font box, click Plot Title, Plot Subtitle, and Legend to select a font. 4. In the Legend box, select the desired; legend position, width, numeric format and background color. 5. Click OK.

The specified options are used, by default, for all subsequent plots.

Page 260: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

246

Including User Information in a Plot

You can customize the printing of your plots to include your company logo and information. You can automatically include logo and text information in printed plots and study reports.

To include your company logo in a plot by default:

1. Click EMS, Options.

The Options dialog box appears.

2. Click the Plot tab. 3. Under User Information, do the following:

a. In the Company name box, type the name of your company. b. Click Browse and select your company logo file in BMP or JPEG formats then click Save. c. In the Author Name box, type your name. d. Check Include user information in the print. e. Check Draw a frame around the plot during printing. f. Check Include it in the report.

4. Click OK.

EMS includes the specified user information by default in study plots.

Page 261: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Viewing Results

247

Probing Results

Probing Results

In many cases, you may want to know the numerical value of the plotted field at a particular location. The following two types of probing enable you to accomplish this task.

Point Probing Spline Probing

Page 262: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

248

Point Probing

The Point Probing functionality lets you display the numerical value of the plotted field at the closest node to the point of clicking. For convenience, the probing dialog box lets you save the listed results to a file.

To point probe a result plot:

1. In the EMS Manager tree, double-click the desired plot icon. 2. Right-click the plot icon and select Probe.

-or –

Click EMS, Post Processor, Probe.

-or-

Click the Probe tool on the EMS toolbar.

The Probe list box appears.

3. In the graphics area, click at the desired location.

The value at the selected location is listed in the dialog box.

4. You can do the following:

Click Plot to generate a 2-D graph of the result values at the locations you probed.

Click Save to save the listed values as an Microsoft Excel Sheet (*.xls) or as a Text File (*.txt).

5. Click Close.

You can use the Probe tool to probe section plots. EMS uses linear interpolation to calculate the value.

To probe a section plot:

1. Create a section plot of the desired result on the undeformed shape of the model. 2. Right-click the plot icon and select Probe.

The Probe Section list box appears.

3. In the graphics area, click the section plot at different locations.

Values of the plotted result at the selected locations are listed in the list box.

4. Click Close.

Page 263: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Viewing Results

249

Spline Probing

The Spline Probing functionality lets you display the numerical value of the plotted field along the spline curve. The Spline Probing is done on a section plot . For convenience, the Spline Probing page let's you save the listed results to a file.

To spline probe a result plot:

1. In the EMS Manager tree, double-click the desired plot icon. 2. Right-click the plot icon and select Spline Probing...

The Spline Probing PropertyManager opens and the dialogues for Spline Options and Section 1 appears.

3. Spline Options. Select the desired options.

o Spline on active section only: select this options to probe the plot on the active section area only. o Free spline: Select this options to move the spline along the full model. o Resolution points: Enter desired number of points to be generated on the spline. o Guiding points: Enter desired number of guiding points on spline. o Import: push this button to import all defined solidworks reference points to be used as guiding

points for the spline. o 2D plot title: Enter the desired 2D spline plot title. o Click Update to update the spline with newly defined options . o Click Save dialog box opens.

a. Specify the destination of the plot file. b. Specify a name for the plot file. c. Select one of the following formats: Bitmap Files (*.bmp) , JPEG Files (*.jpg) or Image

Files (*.gif) o Click Export to save the 2D spline plot listed values as an Microsoft Excel Sheet (*.xls) or as a

Text File (*.txt).

4. Define your section view.

5. Click OK .

Page 264: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

250

Probe

The Probing function allows you to click on a location in a plot and view the values of relevant variables at the node closest to that location. When you probe a result plot, the Probe dialog box lists, in addition to the information mentioned earlier, the value of the plotted result at the node closest to the location you clicked.

Plot information. Displays plot information. This information includes study name, plot type, time step

number and the corresponding time for transient magnetic studies.

Clear. Clears the selected items from the list box.

Save. Opens the Save As dialog box to let you save the information in the list box to a text file (*.txt) or to

an Excel file (*.xls).

Plot. Generates a 2-D graph of the values listed in the dialog box. Linear variation is assumed between

listed values. The graph assumes equal distances between probed locations. Available only for result plots.

Page 265: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

251

Study Reports

Study Reports

The Report tool helps you document your studies quickly and systematically by generating Internet-ready reports. The reports are structured to describe all aspects of the study.

Plots created in the EMS Manager tree can be included automatically in the report. A printer-friendly version of the report can be generated automatically. Reports provide an excellent way to share study results with others online or in printed format. You can modify the various sections of the report by inserting text or graphics.

To share a report, send all associated image files along with the html files. The receiver should place all files in the same folder for viewing.

To start the Report wizard, right-click the Report folder of the study and select Define. Settings that you enter in the Report wizard are used for the report only. For example if you change the Result file location in the Set File section, the actual result location does not change.

Page 266: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

252

Report

The Report Wizard guides you through the process of creating a report for your study.

To access the Report dialog box:

In the EMS Manager tree, right-click the Report folder of the desired study and select Define.

- or -

Activate a study by clicking on its icon and click EMS, Report.

The Report dialog box appears.

Settings for. Lists the sections that you can include in the report:

To remove a section from the report, clear the associated check box.

To preview the contents of a section, click its name and preview the contents in the Preview

area.

Preview. Displays the contents of the highlighted section in the Settings for list box. You can edit the

contents in the preview area as desired.

Report File Name. Lets you specify a name for the report. The file is placed in the active report directory.

Report File Format. Lets you specify the type of report file to be generated . Available file types are : o Html file o Word document file

Report Background Color: Lets you specify the background color of the report file.

Print Version. Check this check box to show a printer-friendly version of the report.

Show Report inside SolidWorks. Check this box to open the report inside SolidWorks by adding a

report viewer tab next to our plot results tab .

Page 267: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Study Reports

253

Generating a Report

To set the report location:

1. Right-click the top icon in the EMS Manager tree and select Options.

The Options dialog box appears.

2. Click Results.

3. To change the report location specified in the Report directory, click Browse and select a new

location then click OK.

To generate a study report:

1. In the EMS Manager tree, right-click the Report folder of the desired study and select Define.

The Report dialog box appears.

2. Click the desired section for a preview of its contents. You can type in the desired information in the

preview area.

3. In the Report file name field, type in the desired name.

The default name is StudyName-mmm, where mmm is a counter to set the rank of the plot in the Report folder. The first report will be labeled StudyName-1, the second StudyName-2 and so on.

4. Under Report Format, choose between Html and MS Word options.

5. Check Show report on OK to open the report upon closing the Report wizard.

6. If you want to automatically save all plots created in the EMS Manager tree and include them in the

appropriate sections of the report, click to check Automatically update all plots in JPEG files. This

option is available on editing mode only.

All plots will be generated in the current view.

6. Check Print Version so that the report graphics are easily printed.

7. Click OK. depending on the report format a report viewing tab will be added to solidworks. User will be

able to browse the report within the same solidworks window enviromnent.

Cover Page

Introduction

Description

Model View

Conclusion

Page 268: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

254

Setting the Cover Page

This section lets you include your company’s logo in addition to the title, author name, company, and date.

To set the cover page of the report:

1. Click the Cover Page section in the Setting For box. 2. Click Browse and select an image for your company's logo. Acceptable formats are: JPEG (*.jpg), GIF

(*.gif), and Bitmap (*. bmp). 3. Type the report title in the Title box. 4. Type the author's name of the report in the Author box. 5. Type the company's name in the Company box. 6. Enter the date of the report in the Date box. 7. Click OK.

Page 269: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Study Reports

255

Setting Introduction

In the Introduction section, you set an introduction to the report. There is no default for the Introduction section.

To write or modify the introduction:

1. Click Introduction in the Setting for list box. 2. Type the text for the introduction.

Page 270: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

256

Setting Description

The Description section provides a description of your study.

To write a description of your study:

1. Click the Description section in the Setting for box. 2. Modify the text as desired using simple text editing rules (like Notepad).

Page 271: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Study Reports

257

Setting Model View

This section lets you include All 3D model views wished to be added to the report as a .JPEG file.

To set the Model View of the report:

1. Click the Model View section in the Setting For box. 2. From Add View select one of the available Model Views , than Check Show Mesh box if you wish to

view the mesh inside the selected view than click the Add... button to add the view to your selected views

list. o Current View o Front View o Back View o Left View o Right View o Top View o Bottom View o Isometric View o Trimetric View o Dimetric View

3. Repeat the above step (2) to include more model views to your report.

To Remove an added view from the selected view list:

1. Select the view to be removed 2. Click the Delete button to remove the view from the list.

To change the sequence in witch the views will be shown in the report:

1. Select a view from the list 2. Click the Move Up or Move Down button to modify the order in witch the selected view will be placed

inside the report.

Page 272: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

258

Setting Conclusion

The Conclusion section lets you write a conclusion for the study.

To write or modify the conclusion:

1. Click the Conclusion section in the Setting for box for a preview of the current conclusion. If you have

not entered a conclusion before, the conclusion will be blank. 2. Write your conclusion or modify it using simple text editing rules (like Notepad). 3. Click OK.

Page 273: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

259

EMS Options

System Options - General

You control the display of error and warning icons in the EMS Analysis Manager tree, the visibility of toolbars, options for mesh and plot appearance, etc.

To set the General options:

1. In the EMS Analysis Manager tree, right-click the part or assembly icon at the top of the tree and select Options.

The System Options - General dialog box appears.

2. Select from the options described below.

Reset All returns the General options to the system defaults.

What's Wrong Messages

o Show errors. Displays the error icon next to the feature that has the error in the EMS AnalysisManager tree. Right-click on the item and select What's wrong? to display the error

message. o Show warnings. Displays the warning icon next to the item that issued the warning in the EMS

AnalysisManager tree. Right-click on the item and select What's wrong? to display the warning message.

Mesh colors

Sets colors for plotting the mesh.

o Boundary Color. Sets the color for plotting element edges.

o Element face color. Sets the color for plotting the bottom faces of shell elements. To change a

color, select boundary or shell bottom face color, click Edit, then choose a color, and click OK.

Result plots

Dynamic plot update. When checked, plots are dynamically updated as the parameters that control

the plots appearance are modified. Turn the flag off to improve performance of viewing results for large assemblies.

Page 274: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

260

System Options - Default Library

Sets the default folders for material and function curves.

Material library. Sets the folders to be searched by default for material library files (*.emsmtr).

Function curve library. Sets the folders to be searched by default for function curve library files

(*.emscur).

To set the Default Library folders:

1. In the EMS Analysis Manager tree, right-click the assembly icon at the top of the tree and select Options.

2. Click System Options, Default Library.

3. To specify default folders for existing material or function curves do the following: a. Click Add.

The Browse for Folder dialog box appears.

b. Navigate to the folder where library files exist and click OK. c. Click Move Up or Move Down to change the folder search order. d. Click Delete to delete a folder. To undo deleting a folder, click Cancel.

4. Click OK.

Page 275: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS Options

261

Default Options (New Study) - Units

The Units in the default Options tab allows you to set the default unit system.

B-H Curve Data. Sets the default preferred units for the magnetic flux density and magnetic field pair when specifying the B-H curve. You may override these units in the dialogue boxes in the Function Curves

dialogue box..

Permanent Magnet Data. Sets the default preferred units for the coercivity and remanence when

specifying a permanent magnet. You may override these units in the dialogue boxes.

Magnetic Field and Flux Density Results. Sets the default preferred units for the magnetic flux density and magnetic field results. You may override these units in the view the results dialogue boxes..

To set Units options:

1. In the EMS Manager tree, right-click the part icon and select Options.

The Options dialog box appears.

2. Click Default Options, Units.

3. From the B-H Curve Data menu, select the desired unit for the magnetic flux density (B) and magnetic

field (H).

4. From the Permanent Magnet Data menu, select the desired unit for the coercivity (Hc) and remanence

(Br).

5. From the Magnetic Field and Flux Density Results menu, select the desired viewing units for the

magnetic the magnetic field (H) and magnetic flux density (B) results.

6. Click OK.

Setting the preferred any of the above units does not restrict you from entering data in other units, the dialog boxes for each one of them let you override the default preferred units.

Page 276: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

262

Symbol Settings-Default Options

Symbol quality

Specifies the quality of the load and restraint symbols.

o Wireframe. Displays 3D symbols wireframe. o Shaded. Displays 3D shaded symbols.

Wireframe quality Shaded quality

Preview all symbols by default. When checked all symbols such mesh control and loads are automatically shown. However, the symbols can later be hidden/shown for each document .

The symbol settings have effect on all the following quantities:

Load/Restraint

Resistance Set

Coils

Force/Torque

Mesh Control

Page 277: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS Options

263

Default Options (New Study) - Load/Restraint

Sets the default size of symbols for analysis features and changes the default symbol colors.

Symbol size

Use the spin arrows or drag the slider to set the desired symbol size.

Symbol colors

Sets the default color of symbols for analysis features such as fixed voltage, normal flux, etc.

To set the default settings of symbols:

1. In the EMS Analysis Manager tree, right-click the part or the assembly icon and click Options.

The Options dialog box opens.

2. Click Default Options (New Study), Load/Restraint. 3. To change the Symbol size, click the spin arrows to increment or decrement the size of the symbol, or

drag the slider to the right (increase) or to the left (decrease). 4. To change the default color of an analysis feature symbol, click its name in the Symbol colors list box,

then click Edit. Select the desired color from the color palette. Click OK to close the Color dialog box. 5. Click OK.

To change the default size and color of a symbol from the PropertyManager:

1. In the PropertyManager of an analysis feature, click Edit color under Symbol Settings.

The Color window opens.

2. Select the desired color, then click OK to close the color window. 3. To change the default Symbol size, click the spin arrows to increment or decrement the size of the

symbol.

4. Click OK .

Page 278: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

264

Resistance Set - Default Options (New Study)

Sets the default size of symbols for a Resistance Set and changes the default symbol colors.

Symbol size

Use the spin arrows or drag the slider to set the desired symbol size for a Resistance Set.

Symbol colors

Sets the default color of symbols for a Resistance Set.

To set the default settings of symbols for a Resistance Set.

1. In the EMS Analysis Manager tree, right-click the part or the assembly icon and click Options.

The Options dialog box opens.

2. Click Default Options (New Study), Resistance Set. 3. To change the Symbol size, click the spin arrows to increment or decrement the size of the symbol, or

drag the slider to the right (increase) or to the left (decrease). 4. To change the default color of an analysis feature symbol, click its name in the Symbol colors list box,

then click Edit. Select the desired color from the color palette. Click OK to close the Color dialog box. 5. Click OK.

To change the default size and color of a symbol from the PropertyManager:

1. In the PropertyManager of a Resistance Set. click Edit color under Symbol Settings.

The Color window opens.

2. Select the desired color, then click OK to close the color window. 3. To change the default Symbol size, click the spin arrows to increment or decrement the size of the

symbol.

4. Click OK .

Page 279: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS Options

265

Coils - Default Options (New Study)

Sets the default size of symbols for a Coil and changes the default symbol colors.

Symbol size

Use the spin arrows or drag the slider to set the desired symbol size for a Coil.

Symbol colors

Sets the default color of symbols for a Coil.

To set the default settings of symbols for a Coil.

1. In the EMS Analysis Manager tree, right-click the part or the assembly icon and click Options.

The Options dialog box opens.

2. Click Default Options (New Study), Coil. 3. To change the Symbol size, click the spin arrows to increment or decrement the size of the symbol, or

drag the slider to the right (increase) or to the left (decrease). 4. To change the default color of an analysis feature symbol, click its name in the Symbol colors list box,

then click Edit. Select the desired color from the color palette. Click OK to close the Color dialog box. 5. Click OK.

To change the default size and color of a symbol from the PropertyManager:

1. In the PropertyManager of a Coil. click Edit color under Symbol Settings.

The Color window opens.

2. Select the desired color, then click OK to close the color window. 3. To change the default Symbol size, click the spin arrows to increment or decrement the size of the

symbol.

4. Click OK .

Page 280: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

266

Force/Torque - Default Options (New Study)

Sets the default size of symbols for a Force/Torque set and changes the default symbol colors.

Symbol size

Use the spin arrows or drag the slider to set the desired symbol size for a Force/Torque set .

Symbol colors

Sets the default color of symbols for a Force/Torque set .

To set the default settings of symbols for a Force/Torque set.

1. In the EMS Analysis Manager tree, right-click the part or the assembly icon and click Options.

The Options dialog box opens.

2. Click Default Options (New Study), Force/Torque. 3. To change the Symbol size, click the spin arrows to increment or decrement the size of the symbol, or

drag the slider to the right (increase) or to the left (decrease). 4. To change the default color of an analysis feature symbol, click its name in the Symbol colors list box,

then click Edit. Select the desired color from the color palette. Click OK to close the Color dialog box. 5. Click OK.

To change the default size and color of a symbol from the PropertyManager:

1. In the PropertyManager of a Force/Torque set. click Edit color under Symbol Settings.

The Color window opens.

2. Select the desired color, then click OK to close the color window. 3. To change the default Symbol size, click the spin arrows to increment or decrement the size of the

symbol.

4. Click OK .

Page 281: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS Options

267

Mesh Control - Default Options (New Study)

Sets the default size of symbols for a Mesh Control set and changes the default symbol colors.

Symbol size

Use the spin arrows or drag the slider to set the desired symbol size for a Mesh Control set .

Symbol colors

Sets the default color of symbols for a Mesh Control set .

To set the default settings of symbols for a Mesh Control set.

1. In the EMS Analysis Manager tree, right-click the part or the assembly icon and click Options.

The Options dialog box opens.

2. Click Default Options (New Study), Mesh Control. 3. To change the Symbol size, click the spin arrows to increment or decrement the size of the symbol, or

drag the slider to the right (increase) or to the left (decrease). 4. To change the default color of an analysis feature symbol, click its name in the Symbol colors list box,

then click Edit. Select the desired color from the color palette. Click OK to close the Color dialog box. 5. Click OK.

To change the default size and color of a symbol from the PropertyManager:

1. In the PropertyManager of a Mesh Control set. click Edit color under Symbol Settings.

The Color window opens.

2. Select the desired color, then click OK to close the color window. 3. To change the default Symbol size, click the spin arrows to increment or decrement the size of the

symbol.

4. Click OK .

Page 282: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

268

Mesh - Default Options (New Study)

You set your meshing options. The mesh that the software generates depends on the following factors:

Active meshing options for the study

Mesh control specifications

Element size and Tolerance (specified in the Mesh PropertyManager)

NOTES

The software continues to use the active meshing options set in the Mesh page of the Default Options (New Study) tab until you change them. Any changes to these meshing options apply to new studies only.

You can modify the meshing options from one study to another.

Meshing options are essential factors in determining the quality of the results. Results based on different option settings should converge to each other if a “small-enough” element size is used.

To access the mesh Options dialog box, right-click the Mesh icon in the EMS Analysis Manager tree, select Create Mesh, and expand Options.

Element Growth Rate

The Element Growth Rate is the maximum ratio between two neighboring elements. The default value is 1.4 which is adequate for most problems.

Accurate Curvature Representation

The Accurate Curvature Representation option, when checked, the mesher follows accurately curved surfaces. The default value is 12 which the maximum angle between the normal to the surface and the normal to the mesh faces.

Automatic Looping for solids

The Automatic Looping for solids option instructs the program to automatically retry to mesh the model using a different global element size. You control the maximum number of trials allowed and the factors by which the global element and tolerance are scaled for each loop.

No. of loops. Sets the maximum number of mesh trials.

Global element size factor for each loop. Factor by which the new global element size is

multiplied to calculate the new global element size.

Tolerance factor for each loop. Factor by which the new tolerance is multiplied to calculate the

new tolerance.

Page 283: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS Options

269

Default Options (New Study) - Results

You set the location for storing analysis information and data.

Results folder

SolidWorks document folder. Sets the results folder in the same directory of the model folder.

Under sub folder. Sets a sub-directory of the model folder as the destination folder of

the analysis results.

User defined. Specify the location of the results folder of new studies. To change the default

location, click and select a different directory.

Report folder

Specify the location of the report of new studies. To change this default, click and select a different directory.

Results folder. If selected, the study report is saved in the same location with the results folder.

User defined. Specify the location of the report folder of new studies. To change the default location, click

and select a different directory.

To change the results location of an existing study...

1. In the EMS Analysis Manager tree, right-click the icon of the study for which you want to change the results location and select Properties.

The property manager page opens.

2. Under the Results folder, click on and select a new destination folder.

To change the report location of an existing study...

1. In the EMS Analysis Manager tree, right-click the report icon and select Define.

The Report dialog box appears.

2. Click next to the Report path box and select the desired destination folder for the report. 3. Click OK.

Page 284: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

270

Default Options (New Study) - Plot

Sets the options for result plots.

Annotation and range

Show minimum value annotation. If checked, the annotation for the minimum value of the plot is

displayed.

Show maximum value annotation. If checked, the annotation for the maximum value of the plot is

displayed.

Show range based on shown components only. If checked, the result range in the legend applies to the shown part only and not to the whole model.

Settings options

Fringe options. Sets the display for the fringe plot. o Point. Uses colored point contours. o Line. Uses colored line contours. o Discrete. Uses color-filled contours with discrete shading. o Continuous. Uses color-filled contours with smooth shading.

Boundary options

o None. Sets the display of the model boundary off. o Mesh. Superimposes the selected result plot on the surface mesh plot. o 3D Mesh. Superimposes the selected result plot on the 3D mesh plot.

Font

Set the font for Plot Title, Plot Subtitle, and the Color Chart.

Page 285: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS Options

271

Default Options (New Study) - Color Chart

Sets the parameters that control the look of the plot legend.

Display color charts. Turns the display of the plot legend on/off.

Display plot details. If checked, displays the model name, study name, plot type, and the deformation

scale of a plot.

Position

Predefined positions. Sets the position of the chart to a predefined position.

User defined. Sets the relative location of the upper left corner of the color bar. o Horizontal from left. Specifies the horizontal distance from the left of the graphics area as a

percentage of the width of the window. o Vertical from top. Specifies the vertical distance from the top of the graphics area as a

percentage of the height of the window.

Width

Controls the thickness of the chart. Available options are: Wide, Normal, and Thin.

Number format

There are 3 options to control the format of the legend values:

Scientific(e). Examples: 1.234e+01 for 12.34 and -1.234e-02 for -0.01234.

Floating(f). Regular decimal format.

General(g). Program may mix scientific and floating formats based on actual results.

No. of decimal places. Maximum allowable number of decimal places is 16.

Color options

Default . Uses the default color map in the plot.

Rainbow . Uses the rainbow color map in the plot.

Gray Scale . Sets the gray scale gradient map. Use this option for black and

white printers.

No. of chart colors. Sets the number of the colors used in the chart (2 to 24).

Flip. Reverses the color mapping.

Any changes to the above settings take effect for new plots only. They do not affect existing plots.

Page 286: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

272

Default Options (New Study) - User information

You enter your company information and author name.

Company name. Enter your company name.

Company logo. Browse in the appropriate folder to select your company logo image file (*.bmp or *.jpg).

Author name. Enter the name of the author.

Include user information in the print. Select this option to include user information in the plots print.

Include it in the report. Select this option to include user information in the study report.

Page 287: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

273

Support and Service

How to Contact Us?

Any of the options below may be selected to contact ElectroMagneticWorks:

Mailing Address

World Wide Web

Page 288: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

274

Mailing Address

ElectroMagneticWorks

8300, St-Patrick Street, Suite 300

Montreal, Quebec, H8N 2H1

Phone: (514) 634 9797

Toll-Free: 1 800 397 1557

Fax: (514) 613 0013

E-mail:

Technical support: :[email protected]

Sales: [email protected]

Page 289: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Support and Service

275

World Wide Web

Web Page: http://www.emworks.com

Page 290: EMS_UserGuide.pdf
Page 291: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

277

Index

0

01 for 12.34 and ..................................................... 279

02 for ...................................................................... 279

0oC .......................................................................... 72

1

1.234e .................................................................... 279

1e-03 ...................................................................... 127

1e-05 ...................................................................... 127

1e-12F ............................................................ 176, 178

2

2D ..................................................... 17, 214, 236, 257

2D Plots............................................................. 17, 216

3

3.526x107 S/m at a frequency = .............................. 48

32oF ......................................................................... 72

3D ..................................................... 17, 120, 216, 242

3D Mesh ................................................................. 278

3D Mesh Pre ............................................................ 15

3D Plot Listing ........................................................ 243

3D Plots ................................................................. 216

3D Plots Animation .................................................... 17

3D Plots Export .......................................................... 17

5

500oC ...................................................................... 72

8

8.854x10 .................................................................. 27

A

A 2D ......................................................... 17, 214, 216

A 3D ......................................................................... 89

A Accurate Curvature Representation .................... 211

A Band ..................................................................... 81

A brushless .............................................................. 81

A brushless DC ........................................................ 81

A Cartesian ............................................................ 148

A changing ............................................................. 199

A checkmark .......................................................... 144

A clipping ............................................................... 103

A Coil ..................................................................... 273

A Coil and .............................................................. 273

A Conductor ............................................................. 25

A Contact Resistance ............................................. 158

A counter to ............................................................ 261

A df ................................................................. 185, 188

A display ................................................................ 242

A Electric Conduction ............................................. 194

A enter a ................................................................ 152

A face ....................................................................... 78

A fan ......................................................................... 78

A floating .......................................................... 25, 157

Page 292: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

278

A Force .................................................................. 274

A Forcer ................................................................... 81

A function of ........................... 38, 40, 56, 58, 147, 171

A Gold Certified ........................................................... 7

A group of .............................................................. 113

A Hysteresis ................................................... 136, 140

A Line Segment...................................................... 236

A link .......................................................................... 3

A list ......................................................................... 19

A Load .............................................................. 93, 110

A load or ................................................................. 155

A Magnetic ....................................................... 97, 169

A Magnetostatic ............................................... 43, 175

A Material ............................................................... 147

A measure ...................................................... 193, 197

A measure of .................................................... 48, 136

A Mesh Control ...................................................... 275

A Motion Analysis ..................................................... 80

A Motor .................................................................... 81

A name ................................................................... 112

A NxN ............................................................. 197, 199

A Paraview ................................................................ 17

A part ..................................................................... 111

A plot ...................................................... 143, 252, 254

A Prandtl Number ..................................................... 79

A receiving ............................................... 91, 119, 181

A Resistance Set .................................................... 272

A Resistance Set and ............................................. 272

A set of ................................................................... 128

A set of partial differential ......................................... 20

A Solid .................................................... 175, 176, 178

A Study .................................................................. 131

A surrounding ........................................................... 79

A Text File .............................................. 243, 256, 257

A Transient Magnetic ....................................... 62, 178

A Transient Magnetic Study ................................... 178

A value ................................................... 164, 165, 166

A Wound ........................................ 170, 175, 176, 178

A/m ......................................................... 136, 140, 143

About Coils ............................................................. 169

About Forces and Torques ..................................... 185

About Function Curves ........................................... 151

About Maxwell's Equations ...................................... 20

About Permanent Magnets .................................... 140

About Resistance ................................................... 193

About SolidWorks Motion ......................................... 80

About Units ............................................................ 107

AC ........................................................ 12, 17, 46, 114

AC and Transient Magnetic .................................... 188

AC and Transient Magnetic Studies ....................... 170

AC Magnetic.. 48, 91, 93, 96, 110, 111, 119, 126, 135, 136, 138, 167, 171, 181, 192, 233, 242

AC Magnetic Analysis .............................................. 53

Performing ............................................................ 53

Page 293: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Index

279

AC Magnetic and Transient Magnetic ...................... 81

AC Magnetic Options ............................................. 126

Accurate Curvature Representation ............... 205, 276

AC-Magnetic Analysis ................................................ 12

Activate SW............................................................ 130

Add Parameter button ............................................ 214

Address .................................................................. 282

Mailing ................................................................ 282

Advanced 3D Spline Probing ....................................... 17

After assigning ....................................................... 102

After assigning a .................................................... 144

After building ............................................................ 90

After finishing the ................................................... 206

After generating a ................................................... 238

After making ........................................................... 203

After meshing ................... 28, 36, 44, 53, 63, 133, 206

After meshing has .................................................. 210

After meshing the ................................................... 206

After rebuilding the ................................................. 203

After running a.................................... 68, 87, 213, 216

After running a Magnetostatic ................................ 103

After running the..................................... 103, 185, 244

After using the tool to ............................................. 235

After Werner ........................................................... 136

Again, Transient Magnetic ............................... 91, 119

Agnetic Field .......................................................... 223

Agnetic Flux Density .............................................. 222

Air Modeling ........................................................... 100

All 3D ..................................................................... 265

All Bodies ....................................................... 144, 147

All EMS .................................................................... 67

All EMS toolbar ...................................................... 114

All Heat Flux ........................................................... 232

All Magnetic ........................................................... 174

All returns the General ........................................... 267

All rotating ................................................................ 81

All studies ............................................................... 214

All Temperature Gradient ....................................... 231

AlNiCo .................................................................... 140

Also assigns a Remanence ............................ 143, 147

Also change the ..................................................... 131

Also computed for ...................................................... 12

Also continue to...................................................... 140

Also determine the ........................................... 91, 119

Also gives a .............................................................. 19

Also mean a ........................................................... 169

Also request to ................................. 28, 36, 44, 53, 63

Also view the .......................................................... 213

Aluminum Oxide ....................................................... 72

Aluminum-Nickel-Cobalt ......................................... 140

American ................................................ 175, 176, 178

An AC Magnetic ............................................... 52, 176

An AC Magnetic Study ........................................... 176

An Add ..................................................................... 89

Page 294: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

280

An Aluminum ............................................................ 48

An browse .............................................................. 147

An electromagnetic .................................................. 67

An Element Growth Rate ....................................... 211

An equi ............................................................. 25, 157

An Excel ......................................................... 235, 236

An Excel file ........................................................... 258

An existing 27, 144, 146, 150, 151, 152, 153, 178, 202

An Existing Library ................................................. 146

An insulting ............................................................ 170

An intervening .......................................................... 66

An Microsoft Excel Sheet ....................... 243, 256, 257

An orthotropic ......................................................... 149

An RLC ..................................................................... 12

Analysis Background ................................................ 19

Analysis Results ..................................................... 213

Viewing ............................................................... 213

analysis steps........................................................... 95

Analysis Type ......................................... 181, 192, 233

analysis types................................................. 138, 167

AND ........................................................................... 5

And AC ................................................................... 114

And AC Magnetics ................................................... 67

And accounts for ...................................................... 80

And affects the ....................................................... 199

And analyze the ....................................................... 80

And analyze the 3D .................................................. 15

And Bitmap ............................................................ 262

And Br .................................................................... 140

And changes the .................................... 271, 274, 275

And choose an ............................................... 148, 149

And choose the ...................... 147, 148, 149, 235, 236

And choose the toolbar .......................................... 114

And color ................................ 271, 272, 273, 274, 275

And computes the ...................................... 25, 81, 157

And conducting ............................................ 42, 51, 61

And Core ................................................................... 12

And create the .......................................................... 95

And define a ..................... 28, 36, 44, 53, 63, 148, 149

And define the ........................................................ 185

And display the....................................................... 244

And drag the .................................................. 235, 236

And drop ................................................................ 112

And Drop Rules ...................................................... 113

And drop to ............................................................ 113

And electromechanical ..................................... 91, 119

And examine the .................................................... 100

And Exit .................................................................. 181

And Exit Ports ................................................ 171, 181

And Exit Ports are .................................................. 171

And export the ........................................................ 243

And expressing the ............................................ 22, 30

And floating ............................................................ 279

And generate a......................................................... 99

Page 295: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Index

281

And high ................................................................... 21

And If ...................................................................... 178

And increases the .................................................... 78

And increment the .................................................. 127

And investigate the ................................................... 94

And iso ................................................................... 103

And Legend ............................................................ 253

And Magnetostatic ......................................... 102, 128

And MEMS ....................................................... 91, 119

And meshing ................................................................ 7

And meshing the .................................................... 102

And neighboring ..................................................... 143

And number of........................................................ 242

And Plane1 ............................................................ 104

And Plane3 ............................................................ 104

And run the .............................. 28, 36, 44, 53, 63, 102

And select a ................... 123, 124, 125, 126, 127, 277

And select an ......................................................... 262

And select the ........................................................ 277

And selecting 3D .................................................... 216

And selecting Create .............................................. 202

And selecting Define .............................................. 103

And shaping ........................................................... 140

And Show ............................................................... 252

And solves ............................................................... 91

And specify the .......................................................... 12

And subfolders ................................................. 93, 110

And Thin ......................................................... 244, 279

And Tolerance ................................................ 204, 276

And touches the ....................................................... 81

And Transient Magnetic ................... 96, 135, 136, 161

And view the........................................................... 258

And viewing during ................................................. 106

And warning ........................................................... 267

And Z ....................................................................... 68

Animate .................................................................. 242

Animate 3D Plots ................................................... 242

Annotating .............................................................. 252

Extreme Values .................................................. 252

Aopen ....................................................................... 17

Applicable Boundary Conditions .................. 41, 50, 60

Applicable Restraints ............................................... 33

Applied Current Density ............ 12, 45, 54, 64, 224, 233

Applied Current Density Plot .................................. 224

Apply ...................................................................... 121

Apply Control.................................................. 207, 208

Apply Material ................................................ 144, 147

Apply Mesh Control ................................ 114, 207, 208

Are allowed for AC Magnetic .................................... 46

Are applied to ......................................................... 155

Are assigned the ............................................ 155, 156

Are computed a ........................................................ 64

Are computed for Core Loss ........................................ 17

Are defined for Magnetic ................................ 170, 174

Page 296: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

282

Are lossless which .............................................. 22, 38

Are modeling .......................................... 175, 176, 178

Are referred .............................................................. 98

Are required for ........................................................ 98

Are used ................................................................. 259

Are used to ............................................................... 98

As floating .............................................................. 157

As Flux is Normal for ................................................ 95

As function of ......................................................... 173

As guiding .............................................................. 257

As iron or .................................................................. 99

As JPEG ................................................................ 247

As links ....................................................................... 2

As load or ............................................................... 111

As NdFeB ............................................................... 140

As representing ...................................................... 136

As specifying a ........................................................... 12

As Voltage .............................................................. 194

Asbestos-cement ..................................................... 72

Assemblies ............................................................. 106

Assembly toolbar ...................................................... 81

Assigning ............................................................... 144

Materials ............................................................. 144

Assing .................................................................... 199

At DC ............................................................... 91, 119

At least one .................................................. 44, 53, 63

Auto-apply Air........................................................... 15

Automatic Looping ................................................. 204

Automatic Looping for ............................................ 276

Automatically .......................................................... 261

Available ................................................ 223, 228, 229

Available Plots........................................................ 233

Avi .......................................................................... 242

AWG ................................................................ 12, 181

B

B 147

B, Br ....................................................................... 140

Back View .............................................................. 265

Background on Meshing ........................................ 201

Basic Concepts of Analysis ...................................... 91

Basic Motion....................................................... 80, 81

Be added ................................................................ 265

Be added to solidworks .......................................... 261

Be applied to ............................................................ 15

Be assigned ..................................... 40, 43, 49, 58, 62

Be assigned a ............................................ 24, 96, 135

Be assigned an ........................................................ 32

Be chosen .............................................................. 233

Be computed for ....................................................... 48

Be computed to ...................................................... 199

Be copied ............................................................... 150

Be defined .................................................... 43, 52, 62

Be discretized to ..................................................... 236

Be exported ................................................................ 17

Page 297: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Index

283

Be generated automatically .................................... 259

Be Magnetassembly ............................................... 105

Be orthotropic for Electric Conduction .................... 149

Be selected to ........................................................ 281

Be specified ............................... 40, 43, 49, 52, 58, 62

Be used to .................................................................. 12

Because electromagnetic ....................................... 100

Because meshing is ................................................. 15

Been enhanced ........................................................... 12

Been improved for ...................................................... 12

Benefits of Analysis .................................................. 90

Between Html and MS Word .................................. 261

Between MKS and CGS ......................................... 107

Between Motor and Force ........................................ 81

Between studies ..................................................... 250

B-H Curve Data ...................................................... 269

BHmax ................................................................... 140

Bitmap Files ................................................... 247, 257

Bmp ........................................................ 247, 257, 262

Bmp or ................................................................... 280

Boolean ....................................................................... 5

Bottom View ........................................................... 265

Boundary Color ...................................................... 267

Br ................. 45, 54, 64, 136, 140, 143, 147, 222, 269

Br and BHmax ........................................................ 140

Browse and ............................................................ 261

Browse to ............................................................... 178

Brushless DC ........................................................... 81

Btu ...................................................................... 70, 72

Btu/s ......................................................................... 70

Bulk Temperature ................................................... 167

Button to ................................................................. 265

Bx ......................................................... 45, 54, 64, 222

By adding .................................................................... 5

By Ampere's ........................................................... 199

By calling ................................................................ 169

By checking Run .............................. 28, 36, 44, 53, 63

By checking the Run .............................................. 133

By clicking .............................................. 131, 216, 260

By clicking EMS ............................. 155, 169, 185, 193

By clicking the Motion Study .................................... 81

By combining the .................................................... 201

By controlling the ...................................................... 99

By creating a Forces .............................................. 185

By creating a Resistance ....................................... 193

By default ............................................... 104, 192, 253

By default for .......................................................... 268

By default the ......................................................... 190

By defining a .......................................... 26, 42, 51, 61

By EMS ...................................................... 91, 98, 119

By EMS as ............................................................. 147

By generating a 2D ................................................ 214

By generating Internet ............................................ 259

By increasing the .................................................... 136

Page 298: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

284

By inserting ............................................................ 259

By introducing an ............................................... 22, 30

By joining the.......................................................... 105

By measuring the ..................................................... 79

By performing ........................................................... 90

By performing the ..................................................... 95

By placing the......................................................... 199

By pushing the New ............................................... 151

By reducing the ........................................................ 90

By reversing the ....................................................... 99

By rotating the ................................................ 185, 188

By saving ................................................................. 89

By selecting the ...................................................... 236

By setting the ................................................. 239, 241

By simulating the ...................................................... 90

By suppressing....................................................... 106

By using a .............................................................. 101

Bz ......................................................... 45, 54, 64, 222

C

C/m ................................................................ 159, 167

CAD ......................................................................... 91

Can add a .............................................................. 251

Can choose to ........................................................ 133

Can create a........................................................... 121

Can create the.......................................................... 81

Can customize the ................................................. 254

Can define an ......................................................... 136

Can edit the ............................................................ 260

Can exclude a ........................................................ 106

Can generate a ...................................................... 103

Can modify the ............................................... 259, 276

Can run the ............................................................ 102

Can select the .......................................................... 81

Can solve the ......................................................... 206

Can specify a ......................................................... 201

Can sustain a ........................................................... 30

Can think of .............................................................. 98

Can view a ............................................................. 103

Can view the ...................................................... 68, 87

Cancel ............................................................ 145, 268

Capacitance Matrix ................................................ 197

Computing .......................................................... 197

Carbon Steel ............................................................ 72

Cartesian ................................................................ 148

Cast ........................................................................ 140

Celsius ................................................................... 167

Charge Density .............................................. 159, 167

Chart Options ................................................. 244, 252

Check ..................................................................... 106

Check All / Uncheck All .......................................... 214

Check Draw a......................................................... 254

Check Enable ......................................................... 204

Check Print Version ............................................... 261

Check Reverse....................................................... 165

Page 299: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Index

285

Check Show ........................................................... 261

Checkbox ................................................................. 67

Choose Material Browser ............... 145, 146, 148, 149

Circuit breakers ........................................................ 21

Circuit Parameters ................................................. 199

Computing .......................................................... 199

Click Add .................................................. 94, 145, 268

Click Browse .......................................................... 262

Click Browse and ........................................... 147, 254

Click Close ............................................................. 256

Click Default Options ...... 269, 271, 272, 273, 274, 275

Click Delete to ................................................ 145, 268

Click EMS .............................................. 253, 254, 256

Click Export to ........................................................ 257

Click Help ................................................................... 5

Click Introduction .................................................... 263

Click Move Up or Move Down ........................ 145, 268

Click New Motion Study ........................................... 81

Click OK 112, 121, 132, 144, 145, 146, 148, 149, 153, 156, 157, 158, 159, 160, 161, 162, 163, 164, 165, 166, 175, 176, 178, 180, 190, 191, 194, 195, 204, 206, 207, 208, 236, 239, 241, 243, 244, 246, 251, 252, 253, 254, 257, 261, 262, 266, 268, 269, 271, 272, 273, 274, 275, 277

Click OK to ............................. 271, 272, 273, 274, 275

Click on Create/Edit Material .. 145, 146, 147, 148, 149

Click Open to.......................................... 151, 152, 153

Click Options .......................................................... 204

Click Plot ........................................................ 235, 256

Click Results .......................................................... 261

Click Save .............................................. 152, 247, 257

Click Save to .......................................................... 256

Click System Options ..................................... 145, 268

Click Tools ............................................................. 106

Click Update ........................................................... 257

Click View .............................................................. 152

Click Yes ................................................................ 249

Clipping .................................................................. 241

Value Range ....................................................... 241

Coil ................. 169, 171, 174, 175, 176, 178, 180, 273

Coil DC Resistance ..................................................... 12

Coil Entities ............................................................ 181

Coil Excitation ........................................................... 12

Coil Excitation and Coupling to External Circuits .......... 12

Coil Excitation and Normal Flux Boundary Condition .... 12

Coil Excitation Functions ............................................ 12

Coil General Properties .......................... 175, 176, 178

Coil Modeling ............................................................ 12

Coil Properties........................................................ 171

Coil to Magnetostatic study .................................... 175

Coil Type ................................................................ 181

Coils or Electromagnets ........................................... 99

Color Chart ............................................................. 279

Color Options ......................................................... 244

Comes .................................................... 107, 144, 185

Common Input........................................................ 181

Compare Studies Results ...................................... 214

Page 300: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

286

Compute Capacitance.......................................... 12, 123

Compute Circuit Parameters ........................................ 12

Compute Flux ......................................................... 228

Compute Voltage ................................................... 229

Computed based ......................................................... 12

Computing ...................................................... 197, 199

Capacitance Matrix ............................................. 197

Circuit Parameters .............................................. 199

Concept of Design Studies ..................................... 118

Conclusion ............................................................. 266

Setting ................................................................ 266

Conduction ............................................................... 70

Conductor .............................................. 114, 157, 167

Floating ............................................... 114, 157, 167

Conductor Number ................................................. 167

Consequently ........................................................... 30

Contact Resistance ................................ 114, 158, 167

Convection ....................................................... 78, 164

Convection Coefficient ........................................... 167

Convection Heat Coefficient ..................................... 79

Coordinate System to ................................... 44, 53, 63

Coordinate Systems ............. 28, 36, 98, 104, 148, 149

Copy ............................................... 112, 235, 236, 250

Core Loss .................................................... 12, 54, 227

Corian ...................................................................... 72

Cork, regranulated ................................................... 72

Cotree ....................................................................... 12

Cotton Wool ............................................................. 72

Cover Page ............................................................ 262

CPU ....................................................................... 199

Create ............................................................ 204, 206

Create Curve .................................................. 152, 178

Create Curve to ...................................................... 147

Create Mesh........................................................... 276

Current ........................................................... 171, 194

Current Density .......................... 54, 64, 221, 225, 233

Current Density Plot ....................................... 221, 225

Current Driven ........................................................ 181

Current Driven Coil ................................. 175, 176, 178

Current Magnitude ................................................. 181

Current View .......................................................... 265

Current-Time .......................................................... 151

Current-Time Curve ............................................... 173

Curve ............................................................. 147, 178

Curve and .............................................. 147, 152, 178

Curve Data ............................................................. 269

Curve Library.................................................. 151, 153

Curve Library or ..................................................... 152

Curve of ................................................................. 143

Curve that .............................................................. 143

Customizing ........................................................... 253

Plot Legend ........................................................ 253

Cylindrical .............................................................. 148

Page 301: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Index

287

D

DC .................................................... 12, 21, 38, 81, 89

DC Current Source ................................................. 178

DC Magnetic Field .................................................... 38

DC Voltage ............................................................. 178

Default .................................................... 145, 244, 268

Default Library ........................................................ 268

Default Options ..... 269, 270, 271, 272, 273, 274, 275, 276, 277, 278, 279, 280

Define ...... 28, 36, 44, 53, 63, 103, 138, 194, 259, 260, 261, 277

Orthotropic Properties ........................................ 138

Define Function Curves .................................. 152, 153

Define Study Name ................................................ 112

Delete ............................................. 121, 132, 152, 249

Demagnetization Curve .......................................... 143

Depending on the ..................................................... 91

Described by a ......................................................... 91

Description ............................................................. 264

Setting ................................................................ 264

Design Studies ................................................. 94, 117

Details ............................................................ 121, 202

Diameter specification................................................. 12

Dimetric View ......................................................... 265

Direction of Coercivity ............................................ 148

Direction of Coercivity to .................................... 44, 63

Directions ................................................................. 98

Specifying ............................................................. 98

Display ................................................................... 244

Display Options ...................................................... 244

Displays 3D ............................................................ 270

DOFs ........................................................................ 91

Dr ..................................................................... 29, 220

Drag and Drop Functionality .................................. 113

Dt ........................................................................... 199

DT/dx ....................................................................... 70

DT/dy ....................................................................... 79

During meshing ...................................................... 210

During printing ........................................................ 254

Dy ..................................................................... 29, 220

Dz ..................................................................... 29, 220

E

Each coil the........................................................... 171

Each conducting................................................. 49, 58

Each floating ...................................................... 12, 197

Each increment ...................................................... 125

Each load or ........................................................... 155

Each omegaT ......................................................... 242

Each study a .......................................................... 105

Eddy ................................................................. 12, 170

Eddy Current Density ............................................. 225

Eddy Currents ........................................................ 170

Eddy Loss ........................................................ 54, 227

Edit ................................. 267, 271, 272, 273, 274, 275

Edit Definition ................. 162, 180, 191, 195, 238, 251

Page 302: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

288

Edit Material ..................................... 28, 36, 44, 53, 63

Editing a Curve Library ........................................... 152

Electric ................................................................... 124

Electric Charge....................................................... 114

Electric Conduction . 30, 36, 67, 91, 93, 102, 110, 111, 119, 124, 128, 138, 167, 192, 233

Electric Conduction Analyses ...................................... 12

Electric Conduction Analysis .................................... 36

Performing ............................................................ 36

Electric Conduction Assumption............................... 30

Electric Conduction Options ................................... 124

Electric Conductivity ............................. 40, 49, 58, 136

Electric Current Density ........................................... 37

Electric Displacement ............................... 29, 220, 233

Electric Displacement Plot ..................................... 220

Electric Field........................... 29, 37, 45, 54, 219, 233

Electric Field Plot ................................................... 219

Electric Potential .................................................... 233

Electric Potential Plot ............................................. 218

Electromagnetic20, 66, 67, 81, 87, 100, 107, 185, 188, 199

ElectroMagneticWorks ................................... 281, 282

Electromechanical ............................................ 91, 119

Electrostatic ............................................... 28, 81, 123

Electrostatic Analysis ............................................... 28

Performing ............................................................ 28

Electrostatic Assumption .......................................... 22

Electrostatic Options .............................................. 123

Element Growth Rate ..................................... 205, 276

Element Types ....................................................... 120

Embedded HTML and Word Doc Viewer ..................... 17

EMS . 7, 12, 15, 67, 80, 81, 89, 91, 93, 94, 97, 99, 101,

102, 103, 105, 107, 110, 111, 113, 114, 119, 128, 133, 143, 144, 147, 155, 156, 157, 158, 159, 160, 161, 163, 164, 165, 166, 169, 175, 176, 178, 185, 188, 190, 192, 193, 194, 199, 201, 206, 210, 211, 216, 225, 226, 233, 247, 250, 254, 260

EMS 2012 .............................................................. 2, 7

EMS also ................................................................ 185

EMS Feature .............................................................. 9

EMS file .................................................................. 105

EMS Fundamentals .................................................. 89

EMS has ........................................................ 216, 234

EMS Help Topics ......................................................... 5

EMS Interface Components ................................... 109

EMS is ........................................................ 12, 89, 108

EMS Manager ........................................................ 132

EMS Manager Tree .......................................... 93, 110

EMS Manager Tree Conventions ........................... 111

EMS Matrix Solvers ................................................ 128

EMS Motion ............................................................. 81

EMS Reference ............................................................ 1

EMS that enable user to view EMS ............................ 9

EMS Toolbars ........................................................ 114

EMS uses ............................................................... 256

EMS uses Vector Finite Element which ................. 120

EMS2012 .................................................................... 1

Emscur ........................................................... 147, 268

Page 303: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Index

289

Emsmtr ........................................................... 145, 268

EMViewer License ..................................................... 9

End Time ................................................................ 127

Energy Prod ........................................................... 140

English ........................................................... 108, 167

Entry Port ....................................... 175, 176, 178, 194

Er ................................................... 29, 37, 45, 54, 219

Excess ....................................................................... 12

Excess Loss ................................................. 17, 54, 227

Exit Port ......................................... 175, 176, 178, 194

Exponential Current Source ................................... 178

Exponential Voltage ............................................... 178

Extra Required Input .............................................. 181

Extreme Values ...................................................... 252

Annotating .......................................................... 252

Ey ................................................... 29, 37, 45, 54, 219

Ez ................................................... 29, 37, 45, 54, 219

F

F/m ................................................................... 27, 136

Fahrenheit .............................................................. 167

Failed Components ................................................ 210

Failed Faces........................................................... 210

Failure Diagnostics ................................................. 210

FEA .......................................................... 91, 101, 201

FEM ........................................................... 89, 91, 201

FEM is ...................................................................... 91

Finite Element Analysis ............................ 91, 101, 201

Fixed Voltage ......................................... 114, 156, 167

Flip ......................................................................... 244

Floating .................................................. 114, 157, 167

Conductor ........................................... 114, 157, 167

Floating Conductor ................................................. 157

FLr .................................................................... 68, 232

FLx ................................................................... 68, 232

FLy ................................................................... 68, 232

FLz ................................................................... 68, 232

FM ............................................................................ 12

Foam Glass .............................................................. 72

For AC ............................................................ 185, 188

For AC and Transient Magnetic ............. 102, 128, 170

For AC Magnetic .................... 185, 188, 223, 228, 229

For analyzing............................................ 91, 101, 201

For carrying ............................................................ 140

For choosing a ....................................................... 190

For conducting ......................................................... 22

For creating .............................................................. 80

For Direct ............................................... 123, 124, 125

For Electric ............................................................. 149

For Electric Conduction .......................... 124, 185, 193

For Electrical ............................................................ 97

For electromagnetic and electromechanical ............. 89

For Electrostatic ............................................. 102, 128

For existing ............................................................ 268

For finding ...................................................... 185, 188

Page 304: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

290

For Force ................................................................. 81

For Iso 1 ................................................................. 241

For Iso Clipping 1 ................................................... 241

For Magnetic ............................................ 97, 149, 171

For Magnetostatic .......................................... 170, 188

For orthotropic .......................................................... 98

For Plot Title ........................................................... 278

For plotting ............................................................. 267

For plotting the ....................................................... 267

For Section 1 .......................................................... 239

For Spline Options and Section 1 ........................... 257

For storing .............................................................. 277

For Transient Magnetic .................................... 91, 119

For viewing ............................................................. 259

For Windows ............................................................. 17

Force Computation Methods .................................. 188

Force Density ......................... 29, 45, 54, 64, 226, 233

Force Density Plot .................................................. 226

Force Distribution ........................................... 185, 226

Force Type ............................................................. 226

Force/Torque.......................................................... 274

Force-based ............................................................. 81

Forced Convection ................................................... 78

Forces .................................................... 185, 190, 191

Forces and Torques ............................... 26, 42, 51, 61

Forms ............................................... 78, 171, 174, 188

Fourier's ................................................................... 70

Fr 29, 45, 54, 64, 226

Free Space Permeability ........................................ 136

Free Space Permittivity .......................................... 136

Fringe Options218, 219, 220, 221, 222, 223, 224, 225, 226, 227, 230, 231, 232

From Add View....................................................... 265

From Analysis ............................................................ 12

From entering ......................................................... 269

From SolidWorks Premium ...................................... 80

From Strontium or Barium Ferrite ........................... 140

From zero ............................................................... 199

Front View .............................................................. 265

Ft hr .......................................................................... 70

Ft hr oF .................................................................... 72

Full license ................................................................. 9

Fx ................................................... 29, 45, 54, 64, 226

Fy ................................................... 29, 45, 54, 64, 226

Fz ................................................... 29, 45, 54, 64, 226

G

General .................................................................. 267

Generating ............................................................. 103

Reports ............................................................... 103

Geometrical Entity .................................................. 167

Gif .......................................................... 247, 257, 262

Glass, Pearls ............................................................ 72

Global ..................................................................... 204

Global Size ............................................................. 206

Page 305: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Index

291

Graphing ........................................................ 234, 236

Results ....................................................... 234, 236

Gray Scale ..................................................... 244, 279

H

H Curve .................................................................. 147

H Curve of a Material ............................................. 143

H/m ........................................................................ 136

H8N 2H1 ................................................................ 282

Hairfelt ...................................................................... 72

Have assigned ................................................... 44, 63

Have assigned an ............................ 28, 36, 44, 53, 63

Have assigned the ................................................. 133

Have decayed to .................................................... 100

Have defined a ....................................................... 113

Have specified the .................................................. 133

Having 7, 12, 15, 19, 22, 24, 28, 30, 36, 40, 41, 44, 46,

48, 50, 53, 54, 60, 63, 67, 70, 98, 100, 104, 107, 112, 113, 133, 138, 140, 143, 145, 147, 171, 181, 199, 214, 216, 224, 233, 241, 242, 266, 270

Hc ........................................... 136, 140, 143, 147, 269

Hc and .................................................................... 140

He Model ................................................................ 216

Heat Flux .................................. 68, 114, 165, 167, 232

Heat Fluxin the ......................................................... 68

Help ............................................................................ 5

High and Very High .................................................... 12

High Precision or Very High Precision ................... 123

Hmax ...................................................................... 143

How to Contact Us ................................................. 281

Hr ................................................... 45, 54, 64, 70, 223

Hr moC ..................................................................... 72

Html ................................................................ 114, 260

Hx ......................................................... 45, 54, 64, 223

Hy ......................................................... 45, 54, 64, 223

Hysteresis .................................................................. 12

Hysteresis and Excess ......................................... 12, 126

Hysteresis Loss .................................................... 17, 54

Hysterisis Loss ....................................................... 227

Hz ................................................... 45, 48, 54, 64, 223

I

Ibrary .............................................................. 145, 268

Ij 197, 199

Image Files ............................................................ 247

Import and .............................................................. 152

Imported Current .................................................... 178

Imported Voltage .................................................... 178

Improved Meshing .................................................... 15

In 3D ...................................................................... 216

In AC ........................................................................ 12

In Amp .................................................... 175, 176, 181

In Amperes ............................................. 136, 140, 143

In Analysis ................................................................. 12

In balance .............................................................. 199

In BMP or JPEG ..................................................... 254

In calculating ............................................................ 80

Page 306: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

292

In case ............................................. 81, 175, 176, 178

In case of ......................................................... 68, 185

In case of Imported Current ................................... 178

In case of Magnetostatic and AC Magnetic ............ 219

In case of Motion .............................. 37, 45, 54, 64, 68

In case of Solid Coil ............................................... 175

In case of Solid Coil and ........................................ 176

In case of Solid or Wound .............................. 176, 178

In case of Wound ................................................... 178

In case of Wound Coil .................................... 175, 176

In CGS ................................................................... 107

In coils for transient magnetic ................................ 151

In computing the............................................... 91, 119

In conducting ................................................ 22, 54, 64

In CosmosEMS .............................................. 185, 188

In Coulombs ........................................... 136, 159, 160

In creating ................................................................ 15

In defining it ............................................................ 121

In determining the ............................ 91, 119, 205, 276

In diagnosing .......................................................... 106

In Electric Conduction ............................................ 136

In electromagnetic .............................................. 21, 46

In electromagnetism ............................................... 136

In EMS12, 19, 24, 66, 96, 99, 104, 135, 138, 140, 171, 174, 188, 197, 199

In EMS 2012 ............................................................ 15

In EMS all ................................................................. 66

In EMS the ....................................................... 81, 193

In Exit Port ............................................................. 175

In Gauss and .............................................. 40, 58, 147

In Gauss for Gaussian ........................................... 140

In Gauss in Gaussian ..................................... 136, 143

In generating an ..................................................... 211

In Hz ................................................................. 48, 126

In identifying ..................................................... 91, 119

In JPEG .................................................................. 261

In Magnetostatic and Transient Magnetic .............. 136

In Maxwell's .............................................................. 20

In Meshing ............................................................... 15

In mind the ............................................................... 22

In MKS ............................... 40, 58, 136, 140, 143, 147

In Motor .................................................................... 81

In Newtons ............................................................. 192

In Oersted .................................................. 40, 58, 147

In Oersted in Gaussian .......................... 136, 140, 143

In Ohms ................................................. 158, 176, 178

In order to .......................................... 12, 100, 138, 216

In pF ............................................................... 176, 178

In Result Viewing ....................................................... 17

In searching ............................................................. 89

In SolidWorks ............................................. 81, 90, 107

In SolidWorks Motion ............................................... 80

In SolidWorks or CosmosWorks....................... 96, 135

In SolidWorks Premium ............................................ 80

Page 307: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Index

293

In Tesla for MKS .................................................... 140

In Tesla in MKS .............................................. 136, 143

In the second.......................................................... 147

In transferring ......................................................... 136

In transmitting................................................... 91, 119

In uncovering the .................................................... 216

In User Interface ......................................................... 9

In viewing the ......................................................... 213

Include AWG ............................................................. 12

Included . 1, 2, 5, 12, 15, 17, 21, 22, 26, 30, 38, 42, 46,

51, 56, 61, 80, 81, 89, 90, 100, 103, 113, 123, 124, 125, 126, 127, 136, 144, 151, 185, 188, 192, 237, 254, 258, 259, 260, 261, 262, 265, 280

Includes probing ....................................................... 15

Includes the .............................................................. 21

Including User Information ..................................... 254

Index ........................................................................... 5

Input ............................................................... 133, 181

Insert .............................................................. 148, 149

Insert->Reference Geometry .................................. 236

Inserting a Materials Library ................................... 145

Inside Out ....................................................... 239, 241

Insulation .................................................................. 72

Interference Detection ............................................ 211

Interference Detection to ........................................ 106

Internally, EMS ....................................................... 197

Internet ................................................................... 103

Into account to........................................ 26, 42, 51, 61

Into SolidWorks ........................................................ 81

Introduction ............................................................ 263

Setting ................................................................ 263

IPS ......................................................................... 167

Is added ................................................................. 145

Is applied by the ..................................................... 185

Is assigned ............................................................. 111

Is called an ............................................................. 136

Is called the .............................................................. 79

Is Cartesian ............................................................ 148

Is completed ........................................................... 111

Is computed ............................................. 25, 157, 185

Is coupled ................................................................. 67

Is coupled to Electrostatics ...................................... 67

Is Direction 1 of Plane 1 ......................................... 104

Is Direction 2 of Plane 1 ......................................... 104

Is displaced a ................................................. 185, 188

Is EMS ..................................................................... 89

Is emscur ............................................... 152, 153, 178

Is function ................................................... 40, 58, 147

Is left to .................................................................... 78

Is linked to .............................................................. 199

Is Magnet ............................................................... 105

Is MKS ................................... 145, 146, 147, 148, 149

Is multiplied to ........................................................ 276

Is needed for Electrostatic ................................ 96, 135

Is Normal ................................................................ 114

Page 308: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

294

Is obtained ....................................... 29, 37, 45, 54, 64

Is orthotropic .......................................................... 138

Is provided for ........................................................ 103

Is provided to.......................................................... 210

Is requested ..................................................... 25, 157

Is required for Magnetostatic ............................ 96, 135

Is said ..................................................................... 199

Is Skin Depth ............................................................ 48

Is Study1 ................................................................ 105

Is StudyName......................................................... 261

Is surrounding the .................................................. 100

Is taken .................................................................... 79

Is Tangential........................................................... 114

Is tied ....................................................................... 79

Is used to ................................................. 78, 185, 188

Is varying ................................................................ 170

Iso .................................................................... 15, 103

Iso 2 ....................................................................... 241

Iso Clipping ............................................................ 241

Iso Clipping Value Range ....................................... 241

Iso Value ................................................................ 241

Iso3 ........................................................................ 241

Isometric View ........................................................ 265

Isotropic Materials .................................................. 138

It allows for ............................................................. 236

It becomes a........................................................... 114

It converges or ....................................................... 127

It corresponds ........................................................ 133

It describes the ....................................................... 143

It encloses the .......................................................... 81

It exhibits a ............................................................. 140

It gives an ................................................................. 48

It provides an............................................................ 89

It relates the ........................................................... 136

It tends to ................................................................. 81

Items in the Loads/Restraint Folder ....................... 113

Its MKS .................................................................. 136

J

Ja ........................................................................... 224

Jax ....................................................... 45, 54, 64, 224

Jaz ....................................................... 45, 54, 64, 224

Je ........................................................................... 225

Jer .............................................................. 54, 64, 225

Jex ............................................................. 54, 64, 225

Jey ............................................................. 54, 64, 225

Jez ............................................................. 54, 64, 225

Joule ........................................................................ 66

JPEG ...................................................................... 262

JPEG Files ............................................. 247, 257, 265

Jpg ................................................. 247, 257, 262, 280

Jr 37, 221

Jx ..................................................................... 37, 221

Jy ..................................................................... 37, 221

Jz ..................................................................... 37, 221

Page 309: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Index

295

K

Kcal .................................................................... 70, 72

Kelvin ..................................................................... 136

L

Languages ............................................................. 108

Layers .................................................................... 241

Lead Pb .................................................................... 72

Left View ................................................................ 265

LI 199

Linear Isotropic..................................... 40, 49, 58, 138

Linear Materials...................................................... 138

Linear Orthotropic .................... 40, 43, 49, 58, 62, 138

Linearity Assumption .................................... 22, 30, 46

List of thermal conductivity values of different materials ............................................................... 72

Listing ............................................................. 235, 236

Listing menu item ................................................... 243

Load/Restraint ................................................ 167, 271

Load/Restraint Folder ............................................. 113

Loads .... 113, 155, 156, 157, 158, 159, 160, 161, 162, 163, 164, 165, 166

Modifying ............................................................ 162

Loads and Restraints ............................................. 155

Loads/Restraint ...................................................... 113

Loads/Restraints .............................. 27, 35, 43, 52, 62

Local Coordinate Systems ..................................... 104

Lorentz ........................................................... 114, 226

Lorentz Force ......................................................... 192

Loss Input .................................................................. 12

Losses Density ................................................. 54, 233

Losses Density Plot ................................................ 227

Lossless Assumption ......................................... 22, 38

M

M0 ............................................................................ 48

Made up ......................................................... 171, 192

Magnetic ................................................................... 12

Magnetic Field ...................................... 45, 54, 64, 223

Magnetic Field and Flux Density Results ............... 269

Magnetic Field Intensity ......................................... 233

Magnetic Field Plot ................................................. 223

Magnetic Flux Density .......................... 45, 54, 64, 233

Magnetic Flux Density Plot ..................................... 222

Magnetostatic ........................................... 67, 125, 127

Magnetostatic Analysis ......................................... 12, 44

Performing ............................................................ 44

Magnetostatic Options ........................................... 125

Magnetostatic Study ............................................... 170

Magnetostatic, AC and Transient Magnetic ........... 171

Magnetostatic, AC Magnetic .................................. 161

Mailing .................................................................... 282

Address .............................................................. 282

Match .......................................................................... 5

material .................................................................. 144

Assigning ............................................................ 144

Material Library ........................................................ 15

Page 310: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

296

Material Models ...................................................... 138

Material Properties ............. 24, 32, 40, 49, 58, 96, 135

Material Properties Used in EMS ........................... 136

Materials ................................................................ 146

Max ........................................................................ 244

Maxwell's ................................................ 20, 38, 46, 56

May couple to SolidWorks Motion Magnetostatic ..... 81

May determine the ........................................... 91, 119

May extend ............................................................ 143

May lead .................................................... 48, 91, 119

May need to ..................................................... 67, 238

May select the ........................................................ 242

May view the .......................................................... 239

May want to .................................................... 243, 255

mesh .............................................................. 202, 276

Parameters ......................................................... 202

Mesh Control .......................................................... 275

Mesh Control Examples ......................................... 209

Mesh Control Parameters .............................. 207, 208

Mesh icon ............................................................... 202

Mesh Parameters ................................................... 206

Mesher in EMS....................................................... 201

Mesher to ............................................................... 205

Mesher's ................................................................... 15

Meshing ......................................... 203, 205, 206, 211

Options ............................................................... 205

Tips ..................................................................... 211

MGOe .................................................................... 140

Min ......................................................................... 244

MK ...................................................................... 70, 72

MoC ......................................................................... 72

Model Origin ........................................................... 239

Model View ............................................................ 265

Setting ................................................................ 265

Modifying ................................................................ 162

Loads .................................................................. 162

Monel ....................................................................... 72

Montreal ................................................................. 282

More 3D .................................................................... 17

More 3D and .............................................................. 17

More Iso Clipping ................................................... 241

More parts ................................................................ 80

More studies........................................................... 214

Most electromechanical ................................... 91, 119

Motion Analysis ..... 12, 80, 81, 123, 124, 125, 126, 127

Performing ............................................................ 81

Motion Analysis uses computationally ...................... 80

Motion Type ............................................................. 81

Multilayers .............................................................. 241

Multiple Studies ...................................................... 129

Multiply Connected Conductor Regions ........................ 12

Must use AC Magnetic ............................................. 48

N

N*Current/PerTurn ................................................. 170

Page 311: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Index

297

N/A ......................................................................... 167

N3430 .................................................................... 140

N3625 .................................................................... 140

N4221 .................................................................... 140

N4816 .................................................................... 140

N5214 .................................................................... 140

N5513 .................................................................... 140

NdFeB .................................................................... 140

NEAR ......................................................................... 5

Neodymium-Iron-Boron .......................................... 140

Net Current ............................................................ 171

Nevertheless, remeshing the ................................. 155

new ........................................................................ 152

New 2D ..................................................................... 17

New Computed Parameters .......................................... 12

New in Meshing & Pre .............................................. 15

New Material Library .............................................. 145

New Motion Study .................................................... 81

New Results ............................................................... 17

New Study ..... 269, 271, 272, 273, 274, 275, 276, 277, 278, 279, 280

Newton ...................................................................... 12

NF .......................................................................... 197

NFBC ..................................................................... 161

NO .................................................................. 138, 192

No default ............................................................... 263

No magnetizing ...................................................... 143

Non Linear Isotropic ............................................... 147

None, Mesh or 3D Mesh ................................ 239, 241

Nonlinear Isotropic ..................................... 40, 58, 138

Nonlinear Materials .......................................... 49, 138

Nonlinear orthotropic .................................. 40, 58, 138

Non-linear Transient Solver ......................................... 12

Normal ................................................................ 12, 97

Normal Flux .................................................... 161, 167

Normal Flux Boundary Condition ................................ 12

Normal Precision .................................................... 123

NOT ............................................................................ 5

Not allowed .............................................................. 49

Not allowed for AC Magnetic .................................... 46

Not continue to ....................................................... 140

Not converge .......................................................... 127

Not entered a ......................................................... 266

Not need to ........................................................ 24, 32

Not remesh ............................................................ 106

Not requested................................................... 25, 157

Not show the .......................................................... 216

NOTE 28, 36, 44, 53, 63, 95, 121, 151, 152, 155, 169, 185, 193, 202, 206, 239, 241

Notepad ......................................................... 264, 266

NOTES ................................................... 112, 113, 276

Nter ........................................................................ 248

O

OC ............................................................................ 70

Page 312: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

298

Oercivity ......................................................... 143, 147

Of 2D ........................................................................ 17

Of 3D ...................................................................... 216

Of AC Magnetic ................................................ 91, 119

Of adding a ............................................................ 174

Of all ferromagnetic ................................................ 143

Of band .................................................................... 81

Of Colors ................................................................ 244

Of computing ............................................................ 15

Of cooling ................................................................. 78

Of cooling states that the ......................................... 79

Of coupling an EMS ................................................. 81

Of creating a........................................................... 260

Of dividing the .......................................................... 91

Of ej ....................................................................... 185

Of electromagnetic ..................................... 20, 21, 185

Of EMS .................................................. 109, 117, 169

Of EMS Curve ........................................ 152, 153, 178

Of EMS Manager ................................................... 214

Of finding the .................................................. 185, 188

Of fixing the ............................................................ 148

Of generating an .................................................... 199

Of improving the ....................................................... 94

Of iso ...................................................................... 241

Of loading ................................................................. 27

Of Loads and Restraints ........................................ 167

Of magnetisation .................................................... 136

Of Maxwell's ............................................................. 22

Of Motion Study ....................................................... 80

Of performing ........................................................... 67

Of plot .................................................................... 216

Of probing .............................................................. 255

Of producing 2D ..................................................... 234

Of producing this .................................................... 216

Of specifying .......................................................... 148

Of specifying the .................................................... 149

Of splitting the .......................................................... 48

Of Study 1 you ....................................................... 214

Of Study Results......................................................... 17

Of subdividing the .................................................. 101

Of toolbars ............................................................. 267

Of vacuum .............................................................. 136

Of values ................................................................ 151

Of viewing .............................................................. 267

Ohmic Loss .................................................. 17, 54, 227

Ohmic, Eddy .............................................................. 12

Ohms/Square ......................................................... 167

Ois the ...................................................................... 27

OK . 131, 145, 147, 152, 206, 238, 261, 267, 268, 271, 272, 273, 274, 275

Omega ................... 219, 222, 223, 224, 225, 228, 229

Ompute Circuit Parameters .................................... 199

On Create .............................. 145, 146, 147, 148, 149

On define the.......................................... 28, 36, 44, 53

Page 313: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Index

299

On editing ............................................... 235, 236, 261

On File ................................................... 147, 235, 236

On OK .................................................................... 261

On Plane1 ........................................................ 98, 104

On Report .............................................................. 213

On SaveAs button to .............................................. 243

On Temperature ..................................................... 233

Only conducting ....................................................... 30

Only Normal ............................................................. 97

Only orthotropic ...................................................... 149

Options .. 105, 145, 205, 206, 253, 254, 261, 267, 268, 269, 271, 272, 273, 274, 275, 276

Meshing .............................................................. 205

Options dialog ........................................................ 276

OR .............................................................................. 5

Or Btu ................................................................. 78, 79

Or create a ............................................................. 151

Or Current Flow ................................................ 91, 119

Or drag the ............................. 271, 272, 273, 274, 275

Or driving the............................................................ 81

Or Electric Conductivity .......................................... 149

Or Electric Field ................................................ 91, 119

Or enter a ............................................................... 178

Or entering it .............................................................. 12

Or Gaussian ............................................... 40, 58, 147

Or Gray Scale ........................................................ 244

Or Image Files........................................................ 257

Or moving it ............................................................ 114

Or PropertyManager to .................................................. 5

Or push the New .................................................... 153

Or saved to ................................................................ 17

Or Search ..................................................................... 5

Or Spherical ........................................................... 148

Or Tangential ........................................................... 97

Or Time Harmonic ............................................ 91, 119

Or windings to .......................................................... 81

Orthotropic ............................. 40, 49, 58, 98, 104, 138

Orthotropic Material ........................................ 138, 149

Orthotropic Properties ............................................ 138

Defining .............................................................. 138

Orthotropic under Relative Permeability ................. 149

Other conducting .............................................. 91, 119

Other electromagnetic .............................................. 30

Other EMS ........................................................... 2, 12

Other hand ............................................................. 170

Other words ................................................... 106, 185

Others . 21, 25, 30, 49, 54, 91, 98, 103, 113, 136, 140, 144, 147, 151, 155, 157, 169, 170, 190, 199, 201, 226, 236, 259, 269, 276

Output of AC Magnetic Analysis............................... 54

Output of Electric Conduction Analysis .................... 37

Output of Electrostatic Analysis ............................... 29

Output of Magnetostatic Analysis ............................. 45

Output of Motion Analysis ........................................ 87

Output of Thermal Analysis ...................................... 68

Page 314: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

300

Output of Transient Magnetic Analysis ..................... 64

Overview ..................................................................... 7

P

Paraffin Wax............................................................. 72

Parameter ...................................................... 202, 214

Meshing .............................................................. 202

Paste .............................................................. 112, 250

Patrick Street.......................................................... 282

P-B Curve .............................................................. 151

Performing ........................... 28, 36, 44, 53, 63, 67, 81

AC Magnetic Analysis ........................................... 53

Electric Conduction Analysis ................................ 36

Electrostatic Analysis ............................................ 28

Magnetostatic Analysis ......................................... 44

Motion Analysis .................................................... 81

Thermal Analysis .................................................. 67

Transient Magnetic Analysis ................................. 63

Permanent Magnet Data ........................................ 269

Permanent Magnetization ...................................... 148

Permanent Magnets ....................... 40, 46, 49, 58, 148

Permanent Polarization .......................................... 136

Permeabilities......................................................... 136

Permeabilities include ............................................ 136

PerTurn .................................................................. 171

PF .......................................................................... 197

Plane1 .............................................................. 98, 104

Plane2 .................................................................... 104

Play to file .............................................................. 242

Plot ................................................................. 216, 248

Renaming ........................................................... 248

Results ............................................................... 216

Plot Legend ............................................................ 253

Customizing ........................................................ 253

Plot Motion Time Step ............................................ 220

Plot Motion Time Step Sets the .............. 218, 219, 221

Plot PropertyManager ............ 220, 222, 223, 224, 226

Plot Step Sets the . 222, 223, 224, 225, 226, 227, 228, 229, 230, 231, 232

Plot Subtitle .................................................... 253, 278

Plot Title ......................................................... 251, 253

Plot Type219, 220, 221, 222, 223, 224, 225, 226, 231, 232

PM .......................................... 145, 146, 147, 148, 149

Point ............................................................... 190, 236

Point Probing.......................................................... 256

Poisson's .................................................................. 22

Polyethylene HD ...................................................... 72

Position/Format ...................................................... 244

Post Processor ....................................................... 256

Pr ............................................................................. 79

Prandtl Number ........................................................ 79

Print Version........................................................... 260

Printing ................................................................... 246

Result Plots ........................................................ 246

Probe ............................................. 235, 255, 256, 258

Page 315: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Index

301

Results ............................................................... 255

Probed Result Plots ............................................... 235

Processing ....................................................... 15, 237

Result Plots ........................................................ 237

Properties . 67, 121, 131, 163, 164, 165, 166, 190, 277

PropertyManager .. 121, 147, 156, 157, 159, 161, 162, 164, 165, 166, 180, 185, 191, 195, 204, 206, 207, 208, 210, 225, 227, 228, 229, 242, 244, 251, 276

PTFE ........................................................................ 72

Pulse Current Source ............................................. 178

Pulse Voltage ......................................................... 178

PVC .......................................................................... 72

Pyrex ........................................................................ 72

Q

Qconvection ....................................................... 78, 79

Quebec .................................................................. 282

R

R,f .......................................................................... 138

Rainbow ................................................................. 244

Raphson ............................................................ 12, 125

Reference Geometry ...................................... 148, 149

Reference Plane .................................................... 239

Reference Plane is ................................................. 239

Reference Point is .................................................. 239

Relative Permeability ............................................. 136

Relative Permittivity ........................................ 136, 149

Remember that Force/Torque is ............................ 190

Remeshing ............................................................. 202

Renaming ............................................................... 248

Plot ..................................................................... 248

Report .................................................... 103, 260, 261

Generating .......................................................... 103

Report Background Color ....................................... 260

Report File Format ................................................. 260

Report File Name ................................................... 260

Required Input........................................................ 167

Required Input for AC Magnetic Analysis ................. 52

Required Input for Electric Conduction Analysis ...... 35

Required Input for Electrostatic Analysis .................. 27

Required Input for Magnetostatic Analysis ............... 43

Required Input for Transient Magnetic Analysis ....... 62

Reset to .................................................................. 206

Residual Induction .......................................... 136, 140

Residual Induction is .............................................. 136

Resistance ..................................................... 193, 194

Resistance Calculation ............................................. 34

Resistance Set ............................................... 195, 272

Responsibility to ....................................................... 81

Restraint .... 67, 93, 110, 155, 156, 157, 158, 159, 160, 161, 162, 163, 164, 165, 166, 167

Restraints and Loads ............................................... 97

Result Databases ................................................... 105

Result Plot Between Studies .................................. 250

Result Plots .................... 103, 237, 238, 246, 247, 249

Printing ............................................................... 246

Page 316: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

302

Processing .......................................................... 237

Saving ........................................................ 103, 247

Resultant Applied Current Density ....... 45, 54, 64, 224

Resultant Current Density .................. 54, 64, 221, 225

Resultant Electric Current Density ........................... 37

Resultant Electric Displacement....................... 29, 220

Resultant Electric Field .................. 29, 37, 45, 54, 219

Resultant Force ...................................................... 226

Resultant Force Density ......................... 29, 45, 54, 64

Resultant Heat Flux ................................................ 232

Resultant Magnetic Field .............................. 45, 54, 64

Resultant Magnetic Flux Density .................. 45, 54, 64

Resultant Temperature ............................................ 68

Resultant Temperature Gradient ............................ 231

Results .. 103, 123, 124, 125, 126, 127, 216, 234, 236, 255

Graphing ..................................................... 234, 236

Plotting ............................................................... 216

Probing ............................................................... 255

Viewing ............................................................... 103

Results Folder ........................................................ 113

Results Table ........... 28, 36, 44, 53, 63, 114, 197, 199

Right View .............................................................. 265

Right-click the Load/Restraint .......... 28, 36, 44, 53, 63

Right-click Vt Curve and ......................................... 152

Right-mouse menus provide ............................ 93, 110

RMS ............................................................... 176, 181

Rock Wool ................................................................ 72

Run ........................................................ 102, 203, 206

Studies ............................................................... 102

Run or .................................................................... 102

S

S1809 ..................................................................... 140

S2712 ..................................................................... 140

S2818 ..................................................................... 140

S3214 ..................................................................... 140

Samarium Cobalt ................................................... 140

Same as Entry Port ................................ 171, 175, 181

Same as Entry Port in Exit Port ...................... 176, 178

Save all .................................................................. 247

Save As .......................................... 103, 235, 236, 247

Saving .................................................... 103, 247, 254

Result Plots ................................................ 103, 247

Search ......................................................................... 5

Section ................................................................... 239

Section 2 ................................................................ 239

Section Clipping ..................................................... 239

Section Plane Center ............................................. 239

Section Value Range ............................................. 239

Select Component Type 219, 220, 221, 222, 223, 224, 225, 226, 231, 232

Select Loss Type .................................................... 227

Select Results Table .............................................. 213

Select Units ... 218, 219, 220, 221, 222, 223, 224, 225, 226, 227, 229, 230, 231, 232

Page 317: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Index

303

Self-inductance ...................................................... 199

Set Temperature .................................................... 163

Set Units ........................................ 163, 164, 165, 166

Setting ............................................ 263, 264, 265, 266

Conclusion .......................................................... 266

Description.......................................................... 264

Introduction ......................................................... 263

Model View ......................................................... 265

Several orders of .................................................... 197

SFFM ........................................................................ 12

SFFM Current Source ............................................ 178

SFFM Voltage ........................................................ 178

Show Mesh ............................................................ 203

Show min ............................................................... 244

Show Report .......................................................... 260

Show/Hide ...................................................... 239, 241

Show/Hide All ......................................................... 239

Show/Hide Mesh .................................................... 114

SI 167

Siemens ................................................................. 136

Sil-o-cel .................................................................... 72

Simplifications or ...................................................... 89

Since EMS ............................................................... 81

Sinusoidal Current Source ..................................... 178

Sinusoidal Voltage ................................................. 178

Skin Depth Calculation ............................................. 48

SmCo ..................................................................... 140

Solid Coil ........................................................ 114, 181

Solid Folder ............................................................ 113

Solids ............................................... 96, 135, 138, 150

SolidWorks ..... 12, 80, 81, 90, 112, 206, 229, 236, 257, 260, 277

SolidWorks 2012 ........................................................ 2

SolidWorks by ........................................................ 260

SolidWorks Configuration ....................................... 130

SolidWorks Help and SolidWorks Tutorials .............. 80

SolidWorks Motion ................................................... 81

SolidWorks Motion to ............................................... 81

SolidWorks toolbar ................................................. 216

Solidworks window enviromnent ............................ 261

Some hints for .............................................................. 5

Some meshing ....................................................... 206

Specifying ................................................................ 98

Directions.............................................................. 98

Spline Options ........................................................ 257

Spline Probing ........................................................ 257

Split Core Loss ............................................. 12, 54, 126

St 282

Stainless Steel ................................................... 70, 72

Start Time .............................................................. 127

Steady State Thermal .............. 67, 124, 125, 126, 127

Study ..... 17, 28, 36, 44, 53, 63, 94, 102, 121, 132, 133

Running .............................................................. 102

Study Name ........................................................... 112

Page 318: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

304

Study Reports ........................................................ 259

Study Types ........................................................... 119

Study, or click EMS ................................................ 121

Study1 .................................................................... 105

StudyName ............................................................ 261

Styrofoam ................................................................. 72

Subfolder .......................................................... 93, 110

Subfolders ........................................................ 93, 110

Such case .............................................. 125, 143, 171

Such class of ............................................................ 24

Such curve ......................................................... 40, 58

Suite 300 ................................................................ 282

Summary of Coils ................................................... 181

Summary of Forces ................................................ 192

Summary of Plots ................................................... 233

Symbol ................................... 271, 272, 273, 274, 275

Symbol Settings ..................................................... 270

System Options .............................................. 267, 268

T

Tc ........................................................................... 140

Temperature................................................... 163, 230

Temperature Gradient ...................................... 68, 231

Temperature Gradient and Heat Flux ..................... 233

Tetra 4 ...................................................................... 94

Tf 78, 79

Tf is .......................................................................... 79

TG ............................................................................ 68

TGr ................................................................... 68, 231

TGx ........................................................................ 231

TGy .................................................................. 68, 231

TGz .................................................................. 68, 231

Than Check Show Mesh ........................................ 265

Than NdFeB ........................................................... 140

That caused the ..................................................... 210

That constitute the .......................................... 190, 192

That define a .................................................. 229, 236

That defines the ................. 28, 30, 36, 44, 53, 63, 149

That describe the ..................................................... 20

That electromagnetic ................................................ 21

That encloses the ..................................................... 81

That fills the .............................................................. 81

That Force .............................................................. 190

That gives the............................. 40, 58, 147, 171, 216

That govern the ........................................................ 20

That issued the....................................................... 267

That lead ................................................................ 100

That need ......................................................... 91, 216

That produces a ..................................................... 169

That relates the ...................................................... 136

That's what makes ................................................. 140

The 2D ........................................................... 236, 257

The 2D Plot .................................................... 235, 236

The 3D ............................................................. 15, 278

The AC...................................................................... 12

Page 319: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Index

305

The AC Magnetic ......................... 46, 48, 49, 126, 138

The AC Magnetic Analysis ....................................... 46

The Accurate Curvature Representation ................ 276

The Add ................................................................. 265

The Animate ........................................................... 242

The Applied Current Density .................................. 224

The Applied Current Density Plot PropertyManager ........................................................................... 224

The Author ............................................................. 262

The Author Name ................................................... 254

The Automatic ........................................................ 211

The Automatic Looping for ..................................... 276

The AWG .......................................... 12, 175, 176, 178

The B ..................................................................... 143

The Band ................................................................. 81

The Band is .............................................................. 81

The better the ......................................................... 101

The Br ............................................................ 136, 140

The Browse for Folder .................................... 145, 268

The Bulk Ambient Temperature ............................. 164

The case ................................................................ 100

The case of Magnetostatic ........................................... 12

The cause of .......................................................... 211

The Charge Density ............................................... 159

The Chart Options .................................................. 244

The Chart Options PropertyManager ..................... 244

The Chart Options PropertyManager to ................. 244

The Circuit Parameters .......................................... 199

The clipping ............................................................ 239

The Coercivity ........................................................ 148

The Coils .................................. 99, 169, 175, 176, 178

The Coils PropertyManager ................... 175, 176, 178

The Color ............................... 271, 272, 273, 274, 275

The Color Chart...................................................... 278

The Company................................................. 254, 262

The Compare Studies dialog Popup ...................... 214

The Compare Studies Results ............................... 214

The Compare Studies Results dialog by ................ 214

The Components and Bodies for Forces ................ 190

The Components and Bodies for Mesh Control .... 207, 208

The Components and Bodies for Resistance ......... 194

The Components or Bodies ................... 163, 164, 166

The Components or Bodies for Charge Density ..... 159

The Components or Bodies for Coils ..... 175, 176, 178

The Components or Bodies for Floating Conductor ........................................................................... 157

The Components or Bodies for Total Charge ......... 160

The Components or Bodies for Voltage ................. 156

The Compute ................................................. 228, 229

The Compute button ...................................... 228, 229

The Compute Flux PropertyManager ..................... 228

The Compute Voltage PropertyManager ................ 229

The Conclusion ...................................................... 266

The conducting........................................... 48, 99, 169

Page 320: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

306

The Contact Resistance ......................................... 158

The Contact Resistance PropertyManager ............ 158

The contents .......................................................... 260

The Convection ...................................................... 164

The Convection PropertyManager to ..................... 164

The Coordinate System ................................. 148, 149

The Copy ............................................................... 250

The corresponding .... 67, 96, 131, 135, 144, 145, 146, 149, 162, 180, 191, 195, 216, 252, 258

The corresponding icon .......................................... 144

The corresponding PropertyManager ..... 155, 169, 193

The Cover Page ..................................................... 262

The Current ............................................ 175, 176, 178

The Current Density ............................................... 225

The Current Density Plot PropertyManager ... 221, 225

The Curve Data ...................................................... 152

The Curve Library .......................... 147, 152, 153, 178

The Curve Name .................................................... 152

The Curve Preview ................................................. 178

The Date ................................................................ 262

The Default Options ............................................... 276

The Define Study Name ......................................... 112

The Delete button to ............................................... 265

The Delete key or ................................................... 152

The demagnetization .............................................. 143

The Description ...................................................... 264

The design ............................................................. 140

The Direct .............................................. 123, 124, 125

The Direction .......................................................... 148

The Direction Type ................................................. 148

The display .... 219, 220, 221, 222, 223, 224, 225, 226, 231, 232, 244

The display of ................................................. 242, 267

The DOFs ................................................................ 91

The driving ............................................................... 99

The Eddy ........................................................ 126, 170

The effect ......................................................... 87, 197

The effects of ..................................... 46, 80, 199, 203

The Electric Conduction ..... 30, 81, 100, 124, 188, 194

The Electric Displacement ..................................... 220

The Electric Displacement Plot PropertyManager .. 220

The Electric Field Plot PropertyManager ................ 219

The Electric Potential Plot PropertyManager ......... 218

The electromagnetic ..................................... 66, 67, 81

The electromagnetic and electromechanical ............ 19

The electromagnetic devices such as ...................... 21

The Electrostatic ............................................ 123, 136

The Electrostatic and Electric Conduction .............. 138

The Element Growth Rate ...................... 207, 208, 276

The Element Size ........................................... 207, 208

The EMS ..................................................... 1, 2, 81, 89

The EMS Analysis Manager .. 145, 267, 268, 271, 272, 273, 274, 275, 276, 277

The EMS AnalysisManager .................................... 267

The EMS Loads toolbar ......................... 175, 176, 178

Page 321: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Index

307

The EMS Manager .. 26, 27, 28, 36, 42, 44, 51, 53, 61, 63, 93, 94, 97, 99, 102, 103, 105, 110, 111, 112, 113, 121, 129, 130, 131, 132, 144, 145, 146, 147, 148, 149, 152, 153, 155, 162, 169, 180, 185, 191, 193, 195, 202, 203, 204, 206, 207, 208, 213, 216, 235, 236, 238, 243,鰸 244, 246, 247, 248, 249, 250,

251, 256, 257, 259, 260, 261, 269

The EMS Manager is ....................................... 93, 110

The EMS Manager tree .......................................... 185

The EMS Online User's Guide ............................... 2, 5

The EMS toolbar ... 102, 156, 157, 158, 159, 160, 161, 163, 164, 165, 166, 190, 194, 256

The ends ................................................................ 199

The Entry Port ........................................................ 171

The Entry Port and ......................................... 171, 181

The existing ............................................................... 12

The existing SolidWorks ......................................... 112

The Exit Port .................................................. 171, 181

The Faces ........................................ 78, 163, 165, 228

The Faces for Contact Resistance ......................... 158

The Faces for Entry Port ................ 175, 176, 178, 194

The Faces for Exit Port .................. 175, 176, 178, 194

The Faces for Floating Conductor .......................... 157

The Faces for Mesh Control ........................... 207, 208

The Faces for Normal Flux ..................................... 161

The Faces for Voltage ............................................ 156

The Failure Diagnostics ......................................... 210

The Failure Diagnostics tool to ............................... 211

The FeatureManager ........... 81, 93, 98, 104, 110, 244

The Finite Element Method .............................. 91, 201

The Fixed Voltage .................................................. 156

The floating ................................................. 12, 25, 157

The Floating Conductor .......................................... 157

The flow ................................................................... 78

The flow of ............................................................... 79

The Flux ................................................................. 228

The following .. 3, 17, 19, 26, 27, 29, 37, 38, 40, 42, 43,

45, 49, 51, 53, 54, 58, 61, 62, 63, 64, 70, 72, 78, 79, 81, 89, 90, 91, 94, 101, 102, 108, 111, 117, 118, 119, 121, 123, 128, 131, 150, 151, 155, 163, 164, 165, 166, 167, 169, 171, 178, 181, 185, 190, 192, 193, 202, 204, 209, 213, 214, 216, 241, 242, 247, 254, 255, 256, 257, 268, 270, 276

The following button ............................................... 239

The following toolbar .............................................. 114

The Font ................................................................. 253

The Force Density .................................................. 226

The Force Density Plot PropertyManager .............. 226

The Forces ............................. 28, 44, 53, 63, 185, 190

The Function Curves .............................. 152, 153, 178

The Function Curves dialog ................................... 151

The Global Coordinate System .............................. 104

The Global Size and Tolerance .............................. 206

The Heat Flux................................................. 165, 232

The Heat Flux Plot PropertyManager ..................... 232

The Heat Flux PropertyManager ............................ 165

The html ................................................................. 259

The hysteresis ........................................................ 143

The influence.......................................................... 143

The Introduction ..................................................... 263

The Iso 2 ................................................................ 241

Page 322: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

308

The Iso Clipping PropertyManager ......................... 241

The Iterative ........................................... 123, 124, 125

The lack of ..................................................... 102, 128

The layer .................................................................. 78

The left ................................................... 111, 244, 279

The Legend ............................................................ 253

The level of .............................................. 91, 119, 171

The listing ............................................... 235, 236, 243

The listing PropertyManager .................................. 243

The Load ... 28, 36, 44, 53, 63, 67, 113, 155, 156, 157, 158, 159, 160, 161, 163, 164, 165, 166

The Local Coordinate System ........................ 148, 149

The look ......................................................... 244, 279

The Lorentz ............................................................ 233

The Lorentz Force Method ............................. 185, 188

The Lorentz Force or JxB Method .................. 185, 188

The Loss ................................................................ 227

The Losses Density ................................................ 227

The Losses Density Plot PropertyManager ............ 227

The Magnetic ................................................. 169, 199

The Magnetic Field ................................................. 223

The Magnetic Field and Flux Density Results ........ 269

The Magnetic Field Plot PropertyManager ............. 223

The Magnetic Flux Density ............................. 113, 222

The Magnetic Flux Density Plot PropertyManager . 222

The Magnetization .................................................. 148

The magnetizing..................................................... 143

The Magnetostatic .................................... 48, 125, 136

The Magnetostatic Analysis ..................................... 38

The Magnetostatic and Transient Magnetic ........... 138

The Manager .......................................... 185, 193, 216

The Material ..................... 96, 135, 145, 146, 148, 149

The Material Database ... 144, 145, 146, 147, 148, 149

The Material PM ............................................. 144, 147

The Maxwell Stress Method ........................... 185, 188

The Mesh Control ........................................... 207, 208

The Mesh Control PropertyManager .............. 207, 208

The Mesh icon........................................................ 276

The Mesh icon and . 202, 203, 204, 206, 207, 208, 210

The Mesh PropertyManager .................................. 202

The mesher .................................... 120, 205, 210, 276

The mesher to ........................................................ 204

The meshing ............................ 15, 204, 206, 210, 276

The MKS ................................................ 107, 193, 197

The model ...................................... 22, 30, 46, 81, 216

The model for............................................................. 17

The Model View ..................................................... 265

The Modified Newton ............................................. 125

The Motion Analysis ................................................. 87

The Motion Study tab and click Create New Motion Study .................................................................... 81

The MotionManager ................................................. 81

The Motor ................................................................. 81

The Move Up or Move Down ................................. 265

Page 323: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Index

309

The moving ...................................................... 81, 185

The names ..................................................... 121, 216

The nanofarad ........................................................ 197

The need ................................................................ 216

The Net Current ..................................................... 175

The Net RMS Current ............................................ 176

The Newton's ........................................................... 78

The Normal Flux ..................................................... 161

The Normal to Plane 1 ........................................... 104

The number of100, 101, 125, 170, 171, 175, 176, 178, 199

The operating ......................................................... 143

The option of.............................................................. 12

The option to .......................................................... 107

The Options .. 253, 254, 261, 269, 271, 272, 273, 274, 275

The Options button ................................................. 202

The Options dialog ......................................... 204, 206

The order of ........................................................... 244

The Origin .............................................................. 104

The orthotropic ............................................... 138, 149

The part .................................. 271, 272, 273, 274, 275

The part or ............................... 98, 104, 105, 112, 267

The Permanent Magnet Data ................................. 269

The plane of ........................................................... 161

The Plot .................................................. 252, 253, 254

The plot or ...................................................... 235, 236

The Plot Results ..................................................... 216

The Plot you ........................................................... 246

The Point ................................................................ 152

The Point for Torque Center .................................. 190

The point of ............................................................ 256

The Point Probing .................................................. 256

The Preview ................................................... 153, 260

The Probe Section ................................................. 256

The Probe tool........................................................ 256

The Probe tool to .................................................... 256

The Probing ........................................... 235, 256, 258

The PropertyManager ... 107, 133, 238, 271, 272, 273, 274, 275

The range of ................................................... 239, 241

The rank ................................................................. 261

The rate .................................................................. 199

The rate of .................................................. 70, 78, 136

The Relative Permeability ...................................... 147

The Remanence..................................................... 148

The Report 28, 36, 44, 53, 63, 103, 259, 260, 261, 277

The Report dialog ................................................... 260

The Report file........................................................ 261

The report of........................................................... 277

The Report Wizard ................................................. 260

The Residual .................................................. 136, 140

The Resistance .............................................. 193, 194

The Resistance PropertyManager .......................... 194

The Resistance Settings .......................................... 36

Page 324: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

310

The Results ............................................ 105, 170, 277

The Results Folder ................................................. 113

The RMS Current ................................................... 176

The rule of ................................................................ 48

The same circuit ..................................................... 199

The Save As................................................... 247, 258

The Search ................................................................... 5

The Section PropertyManager ............................... 239

The Set File ............................................................ 259

The Setting for........................ 262, 263, 264, 265, 266

The Settings for ...................................................... 260

The Show min ........................................................ 252

The Skin Depth ........................................................ 48

The Skin in Depth ..................................................... 48

The Solids ................................ 96, 135, 144, 147, 150

The Solids Folder ................................................... 113

The SolidWorks ........................................ 81, 105, 112

The SolidWorks Motion ............................................ 80

The SolidWorks window ................................. 244, 246

The SolidWorks window is ..................................... 246

The SolidWorks window to ..................................... 246

The Spline Probing ................................................. 257

The Spline Probing is ............................................. 257

The Spline Probing PropertyManager .................... 257

The Split Core Loss ................................................ 227

The starting ............................................ 127, 235, 236

The Studies list....................................................... 214

The study ....................................................... 121, 277

The Study 1 ............................................................ 214

The Study icon and ................................................ 203

The Study Name .................................................... 112

The Study Report and .................................... 197, 199

The subfolders ................................................. 93, 110

The surface .................................. 22, 48, 79, 185, 188

The Symbol ............................ 271, 272, 273, 274, 275

The System Options ............................................... 267

The Table of Contents or ............................................... 7

The table or ............................................................ 147

The Temperature ........................................... 166, 230

The Temperature Gradient ..................................... 231

The Temperature Gradient Plot PropertyManager . 231

The Temperature Plot PropertyManager ................ 230

The Temperature PropertyManager ....................... 163

The Thermal Conductivity ...................................... 136

The Title ................................................................. 262

The TOC ..................................................................... 5

The Torque Center ................................................. 190

The Total Charge ................................................... 160

The Total Charge PropertyManager ....................... 160

The Transient Analysis in ............................................ 12

The Transient Magnetic ............................. 56, 67, 127

The Transient Magnetostatic .................................... 56

The Treat ............................................................... 106

The Turns ............................................... 175, 176, 178

Page 325: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Index

311

The Type of Study .................................................... 81

The undeformed ..................................................... 256

The underlying ......................................................... 19

The Units ................................................................ 269

The value ............... 148, 158, 159, 160, 175, 176, 258

The value of ................................................... 143, 170

The view the ........................................................... 269

The view to ............................................................. 265

The Virtual Work Method ............................... 185, 188

The Voltage ............................................................ 156

The Volume Heat ................................................... 166

The Volume Heat PropertyManager ....................... 166

Then choose a ....................................................... 267

Then define a ......................................................... 138

Then Magnetostatic is .............................................. 48

Then remeshing the ............................................... 106

Then select a.......................................................... 190

Then select the...... 156, 157, 158, 159, 160, 161, 163, 164, 165, 166, 175, 176, 178, 190, 194, 207, 208, 228

Thermal .................................... 67, 163, 164, 165, 166

Thermal Analysis ................................................. 12, 67

Performing ............................................................ 67

Thermal Conductivity ............................................. 136

Thermal Load ......................................................... 167

These meshing....................................................... 276

These opposing...................................................... 199

They exhibit a ......................................................... 140

They know the ........................................................ 233

They represent the ................................................... 99

They represent the discretized ............................... 216

Thick, Normal ......................................................... 244

This Iso .................................................................. 241

This Lorentz ................................................... 185, 188

This option ..................................... 123, 124, 125, 280

This option for ................................................ 244, 279

This option to.................................................. 211, 257

This release to EMS's 5 ................................................. 7

This subfolder................................................... 93, 110

Through 2D ............................................................... 17

Through EMS's .......................................................... 12

Time Curve ............................................................ 178

Time Duration......................................................... 127

Time Increment ...................................................... 127

Tin Sn ....................................................................... 72

Tips ........................................................................ 211

Meshing .............................................................. 211

To AC Magnetic ......................................... 46, 91, 119

To account ............................................................. 143

To achieve the.......................................................... 94

To activate a SolidWorks ....................................... 130

To activate the........................................................ 216

To add ...................................................................... 67

To add a ................. 146, 152, 174, 175, 176, 178, 251

To animate the ....................................................... 242

Page 326: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

312

To assign a ............................................................ 144

To attract or ............................................................ 140

To browse the ........................................................ 261

To calculate the .............................................. 102, 256

To change .............................................................. 244

To change a ........................................................... 267

To change the 123, 124, 125, 126, 127, 145, 235, 236, 261, 265, 268, 271, 272, 273, 274, 275, 277

To change the Symbol ........... 271, 272, 273, 274, 275

To check for ........................................................... 106

To check or ............................................................ 206

To check the..................................................... 94, 206

To close the ........................... 271, 272, 273, 274, 275

To compute a ......................................... 28, 44, 53, 63

To compute the .............................. 197, 199, 228, 229

To consider the ...................................................... 203

To copy a ............................................................... 250

To copy the .................................................... 235, 236

To create a ............................... 94, 112, 121, 145, 152

To create the .......................................................... 121

To customize the ............................................ 103, 253

To decide a ............................................................ 185

To define a 28, 36, 44, 53, 63, 94, 148, 152, 178, 190, 239

To define a Vt ......................................................... 152

To define an Iso ..................................................... 241

To define the ............................................ 80, 149, 155

To delete a ..................................... 121, 132, 152, 249

To demagnetization ................................................ 140

To determine the .............................................. 91, 119

To display a ................................................................. 3

To display a tool ..................................................... 114

To display the ......................................................... 267

To Drag .................................................................. 113

To drive the .............................................................. 80

To edit .................................................................... 152

To edit an ............................................................... 238

To EMS .................................................................... 80

To enter a ....................................................... 152, 153

To enter the ............................................................ 163

To exclude an existant ................................................. 12

To execute a tool .................................................... 114

To existing ................................................................ 15

To expand the item and ......................................... 111

To export the .................................................. 235, 236

To fix the ................................................................ 148

To generate a ........... 28, 36, 44, 53, 63, 235, 236, 261

To generate a 2 ...................................................... 256

To get ..................................................... 35, 43, 52, 62

To give a ................................................................ 216

To Help ....................................................................... 5

To identify a ........................................................... 210

To identify the......................................................... 210

To increase the ...................................................... 125

To increment or ...................... 271, 272, 273, 274, 275

Page 327: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Index

313

To insert an ............................................................ 145

To instruct the ........................................................ 206

To locate a ................................................................... 5

To make ................................................................. 170

To make a ................................................................ 94

To model a ............................................................. 161

To modify a ............................................ 180, 191, 195

To modify the ........................................... 27, 131, 265

To move the toolbar ............................................... 114

To obtain a ................................................................. 12

To perform a Magnetostatic ............................... 43, 44

To perform a Transient Magnetic ....................... 62, 63

To perform an AC Magnetic ............................... 52, 53

To perform an Electric Conduction ........................... 35

To perform an Electrostatic ...................................... 27

To plot a ................................................. 26, 42, 51, 61

To plot the .............................................. 230, 231, 232

To probe a .............................................................. 256

To remove a ........................................................... 260

To Remove an........................................................ 265

To rename a ........................................................... 248

To request the .................................. 28, 36, 44, 53, 63

To run a .......................................................... 102, 203

To run the ............................................................... 206

To save a ............................................................... 103

To save an ............................................................. 247

To save the .................................... 152, 235, 236, 242

To see the ...................................................... 235, 236

To select a ............................................................. 253

To select or unselect all ......................................... 214

To send the ............................................................ 246

To set a .................................................................. 211

To set the 27, 123, 124, 125, 126, 127, 253, 261, 262, 269, 271, 272, 273, 274, 275

To set the Default Library ....................................... 268

To set the General ................................................. 267

To set the Model View ............................................ 265

To share a .............................................................. 259

To show a .............................................................. 260

To show the .. 219, 220, 221, 222, 223, 224, 225, 226, 231, 232

To SolidWorks ....................................................... 7, 89

To SolidWorks Motion .............................................. 80

To SolidWorks Motion is straightforward and ........... 81

To specify a .................................................... 147, 171

To specify an Entry Port and Exit Port ................... 171

To specify the ............... 28, 36, 98, 104, 145, 149, 194

To start a .................................................................. 81

To start the ............................................................. 103

To start the Report ................................................. 259

To studies .............................................................. 250

To suppress the........................................................... 12

To test the ................................................................ 94

To think of ........................................................ 90, 136

To track the .................................................... 235, 236

Page 328: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

314

To transfer the ........................................................ 105

To treat the ....................................................... 25, 157

To turn the ...................................................... 235, 236

To update the ......................................................... 257

To view a ................................................................ 153

To view or .............................................................. 121

To view the ............... 28, 36, 44, 53, 63, 214, 243, 265

To write a ............................................................... 264

To write or ...................................................... 263, 266

Toll-Free ................................................................. 282

Tool Tip .................................................................. 114

Toolbar ........................................................... 114, 216

Toolbar by .............................................................. 114

Toolbar is ............................................................... 216

Toolbars ......................................................... 114, 216

Tools ...................................................................... 211

Top View ................................................................ 265

Torques .......... 28, 44, 53, 63, 185, 190, 191, 192, 274

Torques folder ........................................................ 185

Torques PropertyManager ..................................... 190

Total Charge .......................................................... 160

Transient ........................................................... 12, 127

Transient Analysis ...................................................... 12

Transient Magnetic 17, 91, 93, 110, 111, 119, 138, 167, 171, 181, 192, 233

Transient Magnetic Analysis .................................... 63

Performing ............................................................ 63

Transient Magnetic Options ................................... 127

Trimetric View ........................................................ 265

Ts ....................................................................... 78, 79

Turns ...................................................... 175, 176, 181

Txt .................................................. 243, 256, 257, 258

Type the ................................................................. 175

Typical Magnetic Properties of AlNiCo ................... 140

Typical Magnetic Properties of Ferrite .................... 140

Typical Magnetic Properties of NdFeB ................... 140

Typical Magnetic Properties of SmCo .................... 140

U

Under Analysis ....................................................... 121

Under Automatic .................................................... 204

Under Chart Options .............................................. 244

Under Color Options .............................................. 244

Under Control Parameters ............................. 207, 208

Under Convection .................................................. 164

Under Display Options ........................................... 252

Under Heat Flux ..................................................... 165

Under Legend Options ........................................... 244

Under Mesh Parameters ........................................ 206

Under Property ....................................................... 251

Under Report Format ............................................. 261

Under Results Folder ............................................. 131

Under Study ........................................................... 121

Under Symbol Settings .......... 271, 272, 273, 274, 275

Under Temperature ................................................ 163

Page 329: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Index

315

Under User Information .......................................... 254

Under Volume Heat ................................................ 166

Units ....................................................................... 269

Unix .......................................................................... 17

Until Section 2 is ............................................ 239, 241

Use Animation to ...................................................... 80

Use Basic Motion for ................................................ 80

Use Iso 2 and Iso 3 to ............................................ 241

Use Motion Analysis ................................................. 80

Use Motion Analysis for ........................................... 80

Use Motion Analysis to ............................................. 80

Use PropertyManager ...................................... 93, 110

Use Section 2 and Section 3 to .............................. 239

Use Steinmetz ............................................................ 12

Uses ... 3, 5, 21, 28, 36, 44, 48, 53, 63, 91, 93, 94, 107,

110, 111, 112, 113, 119, 120, 123, 124, 125, 126, 127, 129, 144, 150, 151, 152, 163, 164, 166, 188, 199, 203, 206, 211, 214, 218, 219, 220, 221, 222, 223, 224, 225, 226, 227, 230, 231, 232, 235, 239, 241,鰸 244, 256, 271, 273, 274, 275, 276, 278, 279

Using Design Studies ............................................... 94

Using Drag and Drop to Define Materials ............... 150

Using SolidWorks ..................................................... 80

Uto-insert Air part ..................................................... 15

V

Value Range .......................................................... 241

clipping ............................................................... 241

Variation with.......................................................... 151

View Toolbar .......................................................... 216

Viewing .................................................. 103, 114, 213

Analysis Results ................................................. 213

Results ............................................................... 103

Virtual Work............................................................ 192

Virtual Work or Lorentz Force ................................ 190

Voltage ..................................................................... 25

Voltage and Flux ........................................................ 17

Voltage Driven........................................................ 181

Voltage Driven Coil ................................ 175, 176, 178

Volume Heat .......................................... 114, 166, 167

Vt Curve ................................................................. 151

W

W/m .................................................................... 70, 72

Was required for ......................................................... 12

We attempt to ......................................................... 185

We calculate the ............................................. 185, 188

We make the .......................................................... 169

Web Page .............................................................. 283

Were applied by a .................................................... 81

What is AC Magnetic Analysis ................................. 46

What is Electric Conduction Analysis ....................... 30

What is Electrostatic Analysis .................................. 22

What is Low Frequency Electromagnetics ............... 21

What is Magnetostatic Analysis................................ 38

What Is Motion Analysis ........................................... 80

What is Thermal Analysis ......................................... 66

What is Transient Magnetic Analysis ....................... 56

Page 330: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

EMS User Guide

316

What's .................................................................... 267

What's New.................................................................. 7

What's New in EMS 2012 .............................................. 7

What's Wrong Messages ....................................... 267

When checked ....................................... 205, 244, 276

When checking an .................................................... 94

When creating an EMS ............................................ 81

When electromagnetic ............................................. 20

When Front or Right ............................................... 239

When Front or Top ................................................. 239

When meshing ............................................... 111, 210

When meshing an .................................................. 211

When performing Electrostatic or Conduction ............... 12

When specifying a .................................................. 269

When specifying the ............................................... 269

When Thermal Solution .......................... 37, 45, 54, 64

When Top or Right ................................................. 239

When working with ................................................. 106

Where EMS .............................................................. 95

Which forces the ...................................................... 22

Which gives an ......................................................... 48

Which play an................................................... 91, 119

Which solves the ...................................................... 89

Wide, Normal ......................................................... 279

Wireframe .............................................. 239, 241, 270

With AC Magnetic .................................................... 48

With EMS's................................................................ 12

With respect ........................................... 175, 176, 178

With SolidWorks Motion to ....................................... 81

Without consideration of ........................................... 81

World Wide Web .................................................... 283

Wound and Solid Coils ........................................... 170

Wound Coil .................................................... 114, 181

Wound or Solid....................................... 175, 176, 178

X

X,y ............................................................................ 79

X,yz ........................................................................ 138

Xls .................................................. 243, 256, 257, 258

X-Orientation .......................................................... 239

Y

YES ................................................................ 138, 192

Y-Orientation .......................................................... 239

You accomplish the .................................................. 90

You back to Coils PropertyManager ....................... 178

You ca .................................................................... 214

You change the ...................................................... 206

You change the Result file ..................................... 259

You checked a ............................................... 148, 149

You choose a ........................................................... 68

You complete a ........................................................ 95

You create a ....................................... 27, 96, 135, 155

You create a Magnetic ..................................... 99, 169

You display the............................................... 256, 257

You double the ....................................................... 138

Page 331: EMS_UserGuide.pdf

Index

317

You drag a Magnetic Flux Density Plot icon ........... 113

You drag a toolbar .................................................. 114

You follow the......................................................... 100

You increase the .................................................... 246

You know the ......................................................... 171

You modify the ....................................................... 155

You need the .................................... 27, 35, 43, 52, 62

You need to .............................................. 90, 138, 214

You probe a ........................................................... 258

You reduce the ....................................................... 161

You run a ................. 28, 36, 44, 53, 63, 102, 129, 133

You save the .......................................... 256, 257, 258

You set an .............................................................. 263

You set the ............................................................. 277

You specify a.......................................................... 260

You specify the............................................... 244, 260

You take an ............................................................ 100

You view the........................................................... 213

You want ................ 123, 124, 125, 126, 127, 163, 206

You want the .......................................... 125, 126, 127

You want to ..... 80, 114, 123, 126, 156, 157, 158, 159, 160, 161, 162, 163, 164, 165, 166, 175, 176, 178, 180, 181, 191, 195, 207, 208, 228, 229, 248, 249, 250, 261, 277

You write a ............................................................. 266

Your Model ............................................................. 144

Ypical ....................................................................... 56

Z

Zinc Zn ..................................................................... 72

Z-Orientation .......................................................... 239

Μ

ΜF .......................................................................... 197